p4 Combined

Cambridge International Examinations
Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education

* 7 0 3 2 6 3 3 3 7 5 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) February/March 2016
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the Question Paper.
No Additional Materials are required.
READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST
Write your Centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.
Write in dark blue or black pen.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
Do not use staples, paper clips, glue or correction fluid.
DO NOT WRITE IN ANY BARCODES.
Answer all questions.

Electronic calculators may be used.
You may lose marks if you do not show your working or if you do not use appropriate units.
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
At the end of the examination, fasten all your work securely together.
The number of marks is given in brackets [ ] at the end of each question or part question.
The syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
This document consists of 16 printed pages.
DC (ST/SG) 107601/3
© UCLES 2016 [Turn over
2
1 A driving instructor gives a student a sudden order to stop the car in the shortest possible time.
Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph of the motion of the car from the moment the order is given.
30
speed
m/s
20
10
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
time t / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) The order to stop is given at time t = 0 s.
(i) State the speed of the car at t = 0 s.
speed = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest why the car continues to travel at this speed for 0.9 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Calculate
(i) the deceleration of the car between t = 0.9 s and t = 4.0 s,
deceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the total distance travelled by the car from t = 0 s.
distance = ...........................................................[3]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

3
(c) Describe and explain a danger to a driver of not wearing a safety belt during a sudden stop.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16 [Turn over

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a hammer being used to drive a nail into a piece of wood.
hammer head
nail
wood
Fig. 2.1
The mass of the hammer head is 0.15 kg.

The speed of the hammer head when it hits the nail is 8.0 m / s.
The time for which the hammer head is in contact with the nail is 0.0015 s.
The hammer head stops after hitting the nail.
(a) Calculate the change in momentum of the hammer head.
change in momentum = ...........................................................[2]
(b) State the impulse given to the nail.
impulse = ...........................................................[1]
(c) Calculate the average force between the hammer and the nail.
average force = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

5
3 (a) (i) On Fig. 3.1, draw a graph of extension against load for a spring which obeys Hooke’s law.
[1]
extension
0
0 load
Fig. 3.1
(ii) State the word used to describe the energy stored in a spring that has been stretched or
compressed.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows a model train, travelling at speed v, approaching a buffer.
model train
buffer
spring
Fig. 3.2
The train, of mass 2.5 kg, is stopped by compressing a spring in the buffer. After the train has
stopped, the energy stored in the spring is 0.48 J.
Calculate the initial speed v of the train.
v = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 6]

6
4 (a) The source of solar energy is the Sun.
Tick the box next to those resources for which the Sun is also the source of energy.
coal
geothermal
hydroelectric
nuclear
wind [2]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows a solar water-heating panel on the roof of a house.
copper tubes,
painted black
roof
Fig. 4.1
Cold water flows into the copper tubes, which are heated by solar radiation. Hot water flows
out of the tubes and is stored in a tank.
(i) Explain why the tubes are made of copper and are painted black.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) In 5.0 s, 0.019 kg of water flows through the tubes. The temperature of the water increases
from 20 °C to 72 °C. The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the thermal energy gained by the water in 5.0 s.
thermal energy = ...........................................................[3]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

7
(iii) The efficiency of the solar panel is 70%.
Calculate the power of the solar radiation incident on the panel.
power = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 9]

8
5 (a) A student carries out an experiment to find the relationship between the pressure p and the
volume V of a fixed mass of gas. The table contains four of her sets of measurements.
p / kPa 250 500 750 1000
V / cm3 30.0 15.2 9.8 7.6
(i) Use the data in the table to suggest the relationship between the pressure and the
volume in this experiment. Explain how you reach your conclusion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State the property of the gas, apart from the mass, that remains constant during the
experiment.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A lake is 5.0 m deep. The density of the water is 1000 kg / m3.
(i) Calculate the pressure at the bottom of the lake due to this depth of water.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) A bubble of gas escapes from the mud at the bottom of the lake and rises to the surface.
Place one tick in each row of the table to indicate what happens to the volume, the mass
and the density of the gas in the bubble. Assume that no gas or water vapour enters or
leaves the bubble.
increases stays the same decreases
volume of bubble
mass of gas in bubble
density of gas in bubble

[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

9
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 represents the waveform of a sound wave. The wave is travelling at constant speed.
displacement
of particles
distance
along wave
Fig. 6.1
(i) On Fig. 6.1,
1. label with the letter X the marked distance corresponding to the amplitude of the
wave, [1]
2. label with the letter Y the marked distance corresponding to the wavelength of the
wave. [1]
(ii) State what happens to the amplitude and the wavelength of the wave if
1. the loudness of the sound is increased at constant pitch,
amplitude ...................................................................................................................
wavelength .................................................................................................................
[1]
2. the pitch of the sound is increased at constant loudness.
amplitude ...................................................................................................................
wavelength .................................................................................................................
[1]
(b) A ship uses pulses of sound to measure the depth of the sea beneath the ship. A sound pulse
is transmitted into the sea and the echo from the sea-bed is received after 54 ms. The speed
of sound in seawater is 1500 m / s.
Calculate the depth of the sea beneath the ship.
depth = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
10
7 (a) Explain what is meant by
(i) total internal reflection,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) critical angle.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light, travelling in air, incident on a glass prism.
60°
30°
Fig. 7.1
(i) The speed of light in air is 3.0 × 108 m / s. Its speed in the glass is 2.0 × 108 m / s.
Calculate the refractive index of the glass.
refractive index = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

11
(ii) Show that the critical angle for the glass-air boundary is 42°.
[1]
(iii) On Fig. 7.1, draw carefully, without calculation, the continuation of the ray through the
prism and into the air. [3]
[Total: 8]

12
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows 3 lamps and a fuse connected to a power supply.
220 V
Fig. 8.1
The e.m.f. of the supply is 220 V. Each lamp is labelled 220 V, 40 W. The rating of the fuse is
2.0 A.
Calculate
(i) the current in each lamp,
current = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the current in the fuse,
current = ...........................................................[1]
(iii) the total number of lamps, all in parallel, that could be connected without blowing the
fuse.
number = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

13
(b) After a very long period of use, the wire filament of one of the lamps becomes thinner.
(i) Underline the effect of this change on the resistance of the filament.
resistance increases resistance remains the same resistance decreases [1]
(ii) State and explain the effect of this change on the power of the lamp.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

14
9 (a) (i) State what is meant by the direction of an electric field.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Fig. 9.1 shows a pair of oppositely-charged horizontal metal plates with the top plate
positive.
+ + + + + + + + + + + + +
– – – – – – – – – – – – –
Fig. 9.1
The electric field between the plates in Fig. 9.1 is uniform.
Draw lines on Fig. 9.1 to represent this uniform field. Add arrows to these lines to show
the direction of the field. [3]
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows a very small negatively-charged oil drop in the air between a pair of oppositely
charged horizontal metal plates. The oil drop does not move up or down.
oil drop
–
Fig. 9.2
(i) Suggest, in terms of forces, why the oil drop does not move up or down.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Without losing any of its charge, the oil drop begins to evaporate.
State and explain what happens to the oil drop.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

15
131
10 (a) An iodine isotope 53 I decays by β-emission to an isotope of xenon (Xe).
131
(i) State the number of each type of particle in a neutral atom of 53 I.
protons ......................... neutrons ......................... electrons ......................... [2]
(ii) State the symbol, in nuclide notation, for the xenon nucleus.
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The background count rate of radioactivity in a laboratory is 30 counts / min.
A radioactive sample has a half-life of 50 minutes. The sample is placed at a fixed distance
from a detector. The detector measures an initial count rate from the sample, including
background, of 310 counts / min.
On Fig. 10.1, plot suitable points and draw a graph of the count rate from the sample,
corrected for background, as it changes with time.
300
corrected
count rate
counts / min
200
100
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
time / min
Fig. 10.1
[3]
[Total: 7]

16
11 (a) (i) Fig. 11.1 shows the symbol for a logic gate and its truth table.
input A input B output

A 0 0 0
output 1 0 0
B 0 1 0
1 1 1
Fig. 11.1
State the name of this logic gate. ............................................................[1]
(ii) Complete the truth table for the logic gate shown in Fig. 11.2.
input A input B output

A 0 0
output 1 0
B 0 1
1 1
Fig. 11.2
[2]
(b) Fig. 11.3 shows the system of logic gates used to ensure the security of the strongroom of a
bank.
A
B D
C
E
Fig. 11.3
The strongroom door will only open when the output F is logic 1.
Complete the table to show the logic states at A, B, C, D and E when the strongroom door
can be opened.
input A input B input C output D output E output F
1
[3]
[Total: 6]
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge International
Examinations Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download at www.cie.org.uk after
the live examination series.
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

PHYSICS 0625/41
*9332191914*
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) May/June 2016

1 hour 15 minutes


2
Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s ).
06_0625_41_2016_1.10
2
1 (a) A bus travels at a constant speed. It stops for a short time and then travels at a higher constant
speed.
Using the axes in Fig. 1.1, draw a distance-time graph for this bus journey.
distance
0
0 time
Fig. 1.1
[3]
(b) A lift (elevator) starts from rest at the ground floor of a building.
Fig. 1.2 is the speed-time graph for the motion of the lift to the top floor of the building.
4.0
speed
m/s
3.0
2.0
1.0
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
time / s
Fig. 1.2
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10

3
Use the graph to determine the distance from the ground floor to the top floor of the building.
distance = ................................................................. [4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 [Turn over

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a dummy of mass 70 kg used in a crash test to investigate the safety of a new car.
passenger dummy
barrier compartment
windscreen
Fig. 2.1
The car approaches a solid barrier at 20 m / s. It crashes into the barrier and stops suddenly.
(a) (i) Calculate the momentum of the dummy immediately before the crash.
momentum = ................................................................. [2]
(ii) Determine the impulse that must be applied to the dummy to bring it to rest.
impulse = ................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10

5
(b) In the crash test, the passenger compartment comes to rest in 0.20 s.
Calculate the deceleration of the passenger compartment.
deceleration = ................................................................. [2]
(c) The seat belt and air bag bring the dummy to rest so that it does not hit the windscreen.
2
The dummy has an average deceleration of 80 m / s .
Calculate the average resultant force applied to the dummy, of mass 70 kg.
force = ................................................................. [2]
(d) The deceleration of the dummy is less than the deceleration of the passenger compartment.
Explain why this is of benefit for the safety of a passenger.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 [Turn over

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows an oil tank that has a rectangular base of dimensions 2.4 m by 1.5 m.
oil
depth of oil
1.5 m
1.5 m
2.4 m
Fig. 3.1
3
The tank is filled with oil of density 850 kg / m to a depth of 1.5 m.
(a) Calculate
(i) the pressure exerted by the oil on the base of the tank,
pressure = ................................................................. [2]
(ii) the force exerted by the oil on the base of the tank.
force = ................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10

7
(b) The force calculated in (a)(ii) is the weight of the oil.
Calculate the mass of oil in the tank.
mass = ................................................................. [1]
(c) When he is checking the level of oil in the tank, a man drops a brass key into the oil and it
sinks to the bottom of the oil.
(i) State what this shows about the density of brass.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Explain how attaching the key to a piece of wood could prevent the key from sinking.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 [Turn over

8
4 (a) Explain, in terms of molecules, why it is possible to compress a gas, but not a liquid.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Two containers made of insulating material contain the same volume of water at room
temperature. The containers do not have lids. The volume of liquid in each container gradually
decreases.
(i) After a certain time, the temperature of the water has decreased to below room
temperature.
Explain, in terms of molecules, why the temperature has decreased.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) One of the containers is wide and shallow. The other container is narrow and deep.
Predict which container has the greater rate of cooling. Explain your answer.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10

9
5 (a) State what happens to the molecules of a gas in a sealed container when the temperature of
the gas is increased.
........................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A quantity of gas is contained in a sealed container of fixed volume. The temperature of the
gas is increased.
State, in terms of molecules, two reasons why the pressure of the gas increases.
1. .....................................................................................................................................
2. .....................................................................................................................................
[2]
3
(c) A helium-filled weather balloon is held at ground level. The volume of the balloon is 4800 m .
The pressure of the helium is 98 kPa.
3
The balloon is released and rises to a height where the volume of the balloon is 7200 m .
(i) Calculate the new pressure of the helium. Assume that the temperature stays constant.
pressure = ................................................................. [2]
(ii) Suggest why it may be necessary to release helium from the balloon as it rises even
higher.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 [Turn over

10
6 (a) Two students are measuring the speed of sound.
The students are provided with a starting pistol, a stopwatch and a long measuring tape. The
starting pistol, when fired, produces a loud sound and a puff of smoke at the same instant.
Describe how the students use the apparatus and how they calculate the speed. You may
draw a diagram.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10

11
(b) A device at the bottom of the sea emits a sound wave of frequency 200 Hz.
(i) The speed of sound in sea-water is 1500 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of the sound in sea-water.
wavelength = ................................................................. [2]
(ii) The sound wave passes from the sea-water into the air.
State what happens, if anything, to
• the frequency of the sound, ...............................................................................
................................................................................................................................
• the speed of the sound. .....................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 [Turn over

12
7 (a) (i) A ray of light passes through a length of curved optical fibre.
Draw a diagram showing the fibre and the path of the ray of light.
[1]
(ii) Describe one use of optical fibres in medicine. You may draw a diagram.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10

13
(b) Draw a straight line from each wave on the left to the most appropriate speed.
90 m / s
(9 × 10)
6000 m / s
light in air (6 × 103)
100 000 m / s
(1 × 105)
microwaves in
a vacuum
1 000 000 m / s
(1 × 106)
300 000 000 m / s

sound in steel
(3 × 108)
60 000 000 000 m / s

(6 × 1010)
[3]
(c) The refractive index of a block of glass is 1.5.
Use your value for the speed of light from (b) to calculate the speed of light in this block.
speed = ................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 [Turn over

14
8 (a) Two straight, vertical wires X and Y pass through holes in a horizontal card.
Fig. 8.1 shows the card viewed from above.
card
wire X Y wire
in hole in hole
Fig. 8.1
There is a current in each wire in a downward direction (into the page).
(i) The magnetic field at Y due to the current in X produces a force on Y.
Place a tick in each blank column of the table to indicate the direction of this magnetic
field and the direction of the force.
magnetic field force

at Y on Y
towards the top of the page
towards the bottom of the page
to the left
to the right
into the page
out of the page
[2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10

15
(ii) State and explain whether there is also a force on wire X.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a d.c. supply connected to the input of a transformer.
iron core
d.c. supply galvanometer
Fig. 8.2
When switch S is first closed, the needle of the galvanometer deflects briefly, then returns to
zero.
Explain why the brief deflection occurs.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 [Turn over

16
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a 12 V battery connected in a circuit containing resistors A, B, C and D. Each resistor
has a resistance of 6.0 Ω.
12 V
A B
Fig. 9.1
(a) Calculate the combined resistance of
(i) resistors A and B,
resistance = ................................................................. [1]

(ii) resistors A, B and C,
resistance = ................................................................. [2]

(iii) resistors A, B, C and D.
resistance = ................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10

17
(b) Calculate
(i) the current in the battery,
current = ................................................................. [1]
(ii) the energy transferred from the battery to the circuit in 50 s.
energy transferred = ................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 [Turn over

18
10 (a) (i) Fig. 10.1 shows the symbol for a circuit component.
Fig. 10.1
Name this component.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) In the space below, draw the symbol for a NOT gate.
[1]
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a digital circuit.
A C
B
E
D
Fig. 10.2
Complete the truth table for this circuit.
input A input B output C input D output E
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
[3]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10

19
(c) Suggest a modification to the circuit in Fig. 10.2 to produce the output Z in the truth table below.
It may help you to compare this truth table with the truth table in (b).
input A input B input D output Z
0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0
0 1 0 0
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10 [Turn over

20
11 Bismuth-214 is radioactive. It has a half-life of 20 minutes.
(a) The nuclide notation for bismuth-214 is Bi.
State the composition of the nucleus of bismuth-214.
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Bismuth-214 decays by β-decay to an isotope of polonium, Po.
Complete the equation for the decay of bismuth-214.
214
83Bi
→ ...........
...........
β + ...........
...........
Po
[3]
(c) The count rate from a sample of bismuth-214 is 360 counts / s.
Predict the count rate from the sample after 60 minutes.
count rate = ................................................................. [2]
(d) State two of the social, economic or environmental issues involved in the storage of radioactive
materials with very long half-lives.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_41_2016_1.10

PHYSICS 0625/42
*6573684646*

1 hour 15 minutes

2
This document consists of 22 printed pages and 2 blank pages.
06_0625_42_2016_1.11
2
1 (a) An object is moving in a straight line at constant speed. A force is applied to the object.
State the possible changes in the motion of the object.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows a skier taking part in a speed competition. The winner of the competition has
the highest average speed over the 100 m section shown in Fig. 1.1.
start
skier
100 m
Fig. 1.1
(i) The skier starts from rest and has a constant acceleration. He reaches a speed of
60 m / s in 16 s.
Calculate the skier’s acceleration.
acceleration = ................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

3
(ii) Over the length of the 100 m section, the time recorded is 1.85 s.
Calculate the skier’s average speed over the section.
average speed = ................................................................. [2]
(iii) Suggest why the skier bends his body, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
Explain your answer.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 [Turn over

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows two railway trucks on a track.
5.0 m / s
buffer truck B truck A

5000 kg 6000 kg track
Fig. 2.1
Truck A of mass 6000 kg is moving at 5.0 m / s. It is approaching truck B of mass 5000 kg, which is
stationary.
(a) Calculate the momentum of truck A.
momentum = ................................................................. [2]
(b) The trucks collide, their buffers compress and then they bounce off each other, remaining
undamaged.
After the collision, truck B has a momentum of 27 000 kg m / s.
(i) Determine the impulse applied to truck B.
impulse = ................................................................. [2]
(ii) The trucks are in contact for 0.60 s.
Calculate the average force on truck B.
force = ................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

5
(iii) Calculate the final speed of truck A.
speed = ................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 [Turn over

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a cabin used to transport passengers up a hillside.
NOT TO
SCALE C
drive pulley
connected to
electric motor
pulley 50 m
cable
pulley A B
pulley
cabin
support cabin
Fig. 3.1
The cabin is attached to a cable which moves horizontally from A to B, then up the hill from B to C.
(a) There is an electrical input of energy to the motor which moves the cable.
Place two ticks against types of energy that increase as the cabin moves horizontally at
constant speed from A to B.
kinetic energy of the cabin
gravitational potential energy of the cabin
gravitational potential energy of the cable
internal energy of the surroundings
internal energy of the wires of the motor

[2]
(b) The cabin and passengers have a total mass of 800 kg. The vertical distance between
B and C is 50 m.
Calculate the increase of gravitational potential energy of the cabin and passengers when they
move from B to C.
energy = ................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

7
(c) The cabin then descends back from C to B.
The weight of the cabin pulls the cable, which rotates the motor. The electric motor acts as a
generator when rotated in this way.
Explain the environmental and economic benefits of this arrangement.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 [Turn over

8
4 An archaeologist is investigating a shipwreck and discovers a wooden box on the seabed.
surface of sea
NOT TO
SCALE
15 m
lid
wooden box
0.80 m
1.2 m
Fig. 4.1
The dimensions of the lid of the box are 1.2 m by 0.80 m and the pressure of the atmosphere
5
is 1.0 × 10 Pa. The lid is 15 m below the surface of the sea.
3
(a) The density of sea-water is 1020 kg / m .
Calculate
(i) the pressure on the lid of the box due to the sea-water,
pressure = ................................................................. [2]
(ii) the total pressure on the lid,
pressure = ................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

9
(iii) the downward force that the total pressure produces on the lid.
force = ................................................................. [2]
(b) The force needed to open the lid is not equal to the value calculated in (a)(iii).
Suggest two reasons for this.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 [Turn over

10
5 Two pans containing water are placed on the hotplates of an electric cooker, as shown in Fig. 5.1.
large pan
small pan
hotplates
Fig. 5.1
The hotplates are switched on and the temperature of the water in the pans starts to increase.
When the temperature of the water is below 100 °C, some water is evaporating. At 100 °C, the
water starts to boil and its temperature remains constant.
(a) State and explain which pan has the greater rate of evaporation of water when both pans of
water are at the same temperature.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Apart from the temperature at which it occurs, state how boiling differs from evaporation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) When the water is boiling, thermal energy is being supplied to the water at a rate of 920 W.
(i) Explain the effect on the molecules of the thermal energy supplied.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

11
6
(ii) The specific latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2.3 × 10 J / kg.
Calculate the mass of water that boils away in 5.0 minutes.
mass = ................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 [Turn over

12
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows a protractor superimposed on the path of a ray of light. The light is travelling in
glass towards the boundary with air.
air
180 170 1
170 180
0
10 0
glass
10
20
60
160
20
15
3 0
0
0
30
15
14
40
0
0 13
40
4
1 50 01
0 60 20 50
0 13 110
80 7 20 00 1 60
1 90 70
10
100 1 80
incident ray
Fig. 6.1
(i) Use the protractor to measure the angle of incidence of the ray of light at the boundary
with the air.
angle of incidence = ................................................................. [1]
(ii) The refractive index of the glass is 1.56.
Calculate the angle of refraction in the air.
angle of refraction = ................................................................. [3]
(b) (i) State what is meant by critical angle.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

13
(ii) Calculate the critical angle of light in glass of refractive index 1.56.
critical angle = ................................................................. [2]
(c) Fig. 6.2 shows a water wave crossing a boundary from shallow water to deep water.
new wave
direction
original
wave
direction
deep
water
shallow
water
Fig. 6.2
(i) Name the process that takes place at the boundary between the shallow water and the
deep water.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) Tick one box corresponding to the property of the wave that is the same in the shallow
water as in the deep water.
amplitude
frequency
speed
wavelength
[1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 [Turn over

14
7 (a) Describe the use of X-rays in a security application. Include a diagram.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

15
(b) Draw a straight line from each wave to the most appropriate speed.
300 m / s
(3 × 102)
radio waves 6000 m / s

in air (6 × 103)
1 000 000 m / s
(1 × 106)
ultrasound
in air
300 000 000 m / s
(3 × 108)
X-rays in 60 000 000 000 m / s

a vacuum (6 × 1010)
1 000 000 000 000 m / s

(1 × 1012)
[3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 [Turn over

16
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows a coil wound around a steel bar that is initially unmagnetised.
Any appropriate power supply can be connected between the terminals A and B. No other
apparatus is available.
steel bar
A B
Fig. 8.1
Describe
• how the steel bar can be magnetised,

• how the steel bar can then be demagnetised.
magnetised: ......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
demagnetised: ..................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

17
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a transformer.
240 V
P S lamp
mains
Fig. 8.2
A 240 V mains supply is connected to the primary coil P. The voltage across the secondary
coil S is 12 V. A lamp, in series with a 3.0 A fuse, is connected to S.
The number of turns in the coils of the transformer is not shown accurately in Fig. 8.2.
Predict, with a suitable calculation, whether the fuse blows when there is a current of 0.20 A
in the primary coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 [Turn over

18
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a conducting ball that oscillates between two charged plates.
clamp
insulating
thread
positive plate
negative plate
ball
+ –
very high sensitive

voltage supply ammeter
Fig. 9.1
The ball repeatedly strikes each plate in turn.
(a) Explain, in terms of the charge on the ball, why the ball moves to the positive plate after striking
the negative plate.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) State which particles move through the sensitive ammeter and the direction in which they
move.
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

19
-10
(c) For each complete oscillation of the ball moving between the plates, a charge of 8.5 × 10 C
is transferred from one plate to the other. The frequency of oscillation is 4.0 Hz.
Calculate the current shown on the sensitive ammeter.
current = ................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 [Turn over

20
10 Fig. 10.1 shows part of the circuit of a hair-dryer with a 240 V a.c. supply.
240 V
A
X
B
C
Y Z
Fig. 10.1
The switch can be in one of three positions:
• position A: off (as shown),

• position B: low heater power,
• position C: high heater power.
All three heaters X, Y and Z each have a power of 1000 W when used in this hair-dryer.
Heaters Y and Z have equal resistances.
Calculate
(a) the resistance of heater X,
resistance = ................................................................. [2]
(b) the resistance of heater Y,
resistance = ................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

21
(c) the current in heater Z when the switch is in position C.
current = ................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11 [Turn over

22
11 Radon-220 is a radioactive isotope.
(a) The nuclide notation for radon-220 is Rn.
Describe the composition of a neutral atom of radon-220.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) A nucleus of radon-220 decays to an isotope of polonium (Po) by emitting an alpha particle.
Complete the nuclide equation for the decay of radon-220.
220
86Rn
→ ...........
...........
α + ...........
...........
Po
[3]
(c) A detector of radiation is placed near a sample of radon-220 and gives a reading of
720 counts / s. The half-life of radon-220 is 55 s.
Calculate the reading after 220 s. Ignore background radiation.
reading = ................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_42_2016_1.11

PHYSICS 0625/43
*8543501407*

1 hour 15 minutes

2
06_0625_43_2016_1.8
2
1 (a) State why force is a vector quantity.
........................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A 20 N force and a 15 N force act at the same time on an object of mass 14 kg.
Calculate
(i) the maximum possible force on the object due to these two forces,
force = ................................................................. [1]
(ii) the acceleration caused by a resultant force equal to this maximum force.
acceleration = ................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

3
(c) Fig. 1.1 shows a river in which the velocity of the flowing water is 0.85 m / s parallel to the river
banks.
river bank
velocity of swimmer
velocity relative to water
of water NOT TO
45° 1.2 m / s
SCALE
0.85 m / s
Fig. 1.1
A swimmer sets off from one bank. The velocity of the swimmer relative to the water is 1.2 m / s
at 45° to the river banks, as shown in Fig. 1.1.
In the space below, draw a scale diagram to determine the resultant velocity of the swimmer
relative to the river banks. This velocity is the resultant of the two velocities shown on Fig. 1.1.
Label this resultant on your diagram.
resultant velocity = ................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 [Turn over

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows two cars, A and B, before they collide.
18 m / s
stationary
car B car A
Fig. 2.1
Car B, of mass 1200 kg, is stationary. Car A, of mass 2000 kg, is travelling towards car B at 18 m / s.
(a) Calculate the momentum of car A.
momentum = ................................................................. [2]
(b) The cars collide and car B experiences an impulse. Car A continues to move in the same
direction, with a momentum of 21 000 kg m / s.
(i) Calculate the momentum of car B immediately after the collision.
momentum = ................................................................. [1]
(ii) Determine the average impulse experienced by car B during the collision.
impulse = ................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

5
(iii) The cars are in contact for 0.20 s.
Calculate the average resultant force experienced by car B during the collision.
force = ................................................................. [2]
(c) A modern car is designed so that, during a collision, the front section of the car is crushed and
the time of contact increases.
Explain the benefit of increasing the time of contact for the people in the car.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 [Turn over

6
3 A test-tube containing solid wax is heated by placing it in a beaker of very hot water for several
minutes. The solid wax becomes a liquid.
(a) State, in terms of molecules, how a solid differs from a liquid.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Explain, in terms of molecules, why thermal energy must be supplied for a solid to become a
liquid.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [1]
(c) The test-tube is removed from the hot water and held in a clamp stand.
Fig. 3.1 shows the test-tube and liquid wax cooling in air.
thermometer
stopwatch
liquid
wax
hot water
Fig. 3.1
As the wax cools, its temperature is recorded at regular time intervals.
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

7
Fig. 3.2 is the temperature-time graph for the wax.
100
temperature / °C
80
60
40
20
0 4 8 12 16 20
time / min
Fig. 3.2
(i) Using Fig. 3.2, determine the melting point of the wax.
melting point = ................................................................. [1]
(ii) The specific latent heat of fusion of the wax is 210 J / g. The test-tube contains 50 g of
wax.
Using Fig. 3.2, determine the rate at which the wax is losing internal energy as the wax
solidifies. Give your answer in J / min.
rate of loss of energy = ....................................................... J / min [4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 [Turn over

8
4 In an industrial process, a gas that is already at high pressure is trapped in a large cylinder by a
piston.
Fig. 4.1 shows the gas, the cylinder and the piston.
high-pressure gas
piston
cylinder
Fig. 4.1
The piston is pushed into the cylinder. As the pressure of the gas changes, its temperature remains
constant.
(a) Fig. 4.2 shows how the pressure of the trapped gas depends on its volume.
20
pressure / MPa
15
10
0
0 0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40
volume / m3
Fig. 4.2
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

9
(i) Describe the relationship shown by the graph between the pressure of the gas and the
volume it occupies. Explain this relationship in terms of the molecules.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [3]
(ii) Determine the volume occupied by the gas when it is released into the atmosphere at
a pressure of 0.10 MPa. You will need to use data from Fig. 4.2.
volume = ....................................................... [2]
(b) An unused cylinder of the compressed gas is moved into a cold warehouse. The temperature
of the gas decreases.
State how the decrease in the temperature affects
(i) the motion of the gas molecules,
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(ii) the pressure of the gas in the cylinder.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 [Turn over

10
5 (a) Radio waves, ultrasound and visible light are all waves.
(i) State what is meant by ultrasound and suggest a value for the minimum possible
frequency of ultrasound waves.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [2]
(ii) State which of these waves are
• electromagnetic,
................................................................................................................................
• longitudinal.
................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

11
(b) Ultrasound passes through both human flesh and bone.
Fig. 5.1 shows an ultrasound source sending an ultrasound wave into human flesh.
flesh bone flesh
X Y
ultrasound
source
thickness t
Fig. 5.1
The ultrasound wave travels through the flesh to point X and then through the thickness of the
bone to point Y. At Y, some ultrasound is reflected and returns to X.
–6
The total time taken for ultrasound to travel in the bone from X to Y and back to X is 9.0 × 10 s.
The speed of ultrasound in bone is 4100 m / s.
Calculate the thickness t of the bone.
thickness t = ................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 [Turn over

12
6 (a) A block is made from a particular type of glass.
Fig. 6.1 shows light passing from air into the glass block.
29° air
glass
33° NOT TO
SCALE
Fig. 6.1
Using information from Fig. 6.1, calculate
(i) the refractive index of light in this type of glass,
refractive index = ................................................................. [3]
(ii) the critical angle for light travelling in this type of glass.
critical angle = ................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

13
(b) State one application of optical fibres. Draw a diagram that shows how an optical fibre is used
in this application.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 [Turn over

14
7 A lightning conductor protects a tall building and the people in it against damage and injury caused
by lightning strikes.
The lightning conductor is a very long strip of copper that is attached to the side of the building. At
the top of the building, the strip of copper is connected to a vertical metal pole and at the bottom
of the building, it is buried in the ground.
Fig. 7.1 shows a thundercloud passing over the building.
thundercloud
– – – – – –
metal pole
building
lightning
conductor
ground
Fig. 7.1
The bottom of the thundercloud is negatively charged.
As the cloud moves closer to the building, the top of the metal pole becomes charged.
(a) State the sign of the charge at the top of the metal pole. Explain, in terms of the particles
involved, how it becomes charged.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

15
(b) As the cloud passes over the building, a lightning strike occurs and a charge of 0.84 C flows
–5
through the lightning conductor. The charge flows for 3.5 × 10 s.
(i) Calculate the average current in the lightning conductor during this time.
current = ................................................................. [2]
(ii) It is suggested that the current in the lightning conductor could be measured by
connecting a laboratory ammeter between the pole and the copper strip.
State one reason why this cannot be successful.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
(c) The copper strip has a large cross-sectional area.
State how increasing the cross-sectional area of the copper strip affects its resistance.
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 [Turn over

16
8 (a) (i) In the space below, draw the symbol for a NOR gate.
[1]
(ii) Complete the truth table for a NOR gate.
input 1 input 2 output
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
[2]
(b) The fuel for an engine needs to be warm in order for the engine to work. If the temperature
of the fuel is below the working temperature TW, an LED emits light.
Fig. 8.1 is the diagram of the circuit that includes the LED.
Fig. 8.1
Component Y is in thermal contact with the fuel.
(i) State the name of component X and the name of component Y.
X ............................................................................................................................
Y ............................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

17
(ii) The fuel is too cold and the LED is emitting light.
State and explain what happens in the circuit as the temperature of the fuel increases
to a value above TW.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [3]
(c) In Fig. 8.2, the LED is now in parallel with component X instead of with component Y.
Fig. 8.2
The temperature of component Y increases from a value below TW to a value above TW.
Predict what happens in this circuit. Suggest a use for the circuit.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
........................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 [Turn over

18
9 The two ends of a metal rod are connected by copper wire to a very sensitive ammeter. The rod is
placed horizontally in the horizontal magnetic field between the N-pole and S-pole of a permanent
magnet, as shown in Fig. 9.1.
horizontal
metal rod
vertical N
movement
S
N A
sensitive
ammeter
magnet S
magnet
Fig. 9.1
(a) The rod is moved upwards at constant speed in the direction shown by the arrow in Fig. 9.1.
An e.m.f. is induced in the rod.
(i) State two factors that determine the size of the induced e.m.f.
1. ............................................................................................................................
2. ............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The size of the current in the ammeter depends on the size of the induced e.m.f.
State one other factor that affects the size of the current.
................................................................................................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

19
(iii) The direction of motion of the rod is now changed . It moves at a constant speed towards
the N-pole, as shown in Fig. 9.2.
horizontal
movement
N
S
N A
Fig. 9.2
State and explain what happens to the induced e.m.f.
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 [Turn over

20
(b) Fig. 9.3 shows a rectangular coil of wire placed in the same horizontal magnetic field.
N rotation
rectangular coil
N S
Fig. 9.3
The coil rotates in the direction shown by the arrow in Fig. 9.3. An e.m.f. is induced in the coil.
(i) On Fig. 9.4, sketch a graph to show how the e.m.f. varies with time for two complete
revolutions of the coil.
e.m.f.
0
0 time
Fig. 9.4
[2]
(ii) On your sketch in Fig. 9.4, mark a letter T to indicate a time when the coil is horizontal,
as shown in Fig. 9.3.
[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

21
10 A sample contains atoms of a particular isotope of protactinium .
(a) A nucleus of this protactinium isotope contains 91 protons and 143 neutrons.
(i) State the values of X and Y in the symbol .
X = .................................................................
Y = .................................................................
[2]
(ii) This isotope is radioactive and it decays by the emission of a β-particle, β, to an

isotope of uranium, U.
Complete the equation for the decay of a protactinium nucleus.
............. .............
–1 β
0
............. Pa + ............. U
[2]
(b) A radiation detector measures a background count rate in a laboratory of 32 counts / minute.
(i) Suggest two naturally occurring sources of background radiation.
1. ............................................................................................................................
2. ............................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The sample is placed in the laboratory close to the radiation detector, and the count
rate increases to 544 counts / minute.
This isotope of protactinium has a half-life of 400 minutes.
Predict a value for the count rate measured 1200 minutes later.
count rate = ....................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8 [Turn over

22
(iii) Suggest one reason why the count rate measured 1200 minutes later may differ slightly
from the value predicted in (b)(ii).
................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 11]
© UCLES 2016 06_0625_43_2016_1.8

* 5 2 5 4 5 2 0 8 1 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) October/November 2016
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CW/FD) 116034/8
2
1 An astronaut on the Moon drops a feather from rest, off the top of a small cliff. The acceleration
due to gravity on the Moon is 1.6 m / s2. There is no air on the Moon.
(a) The feather falls for 4.5 s before it hits the ground.
(i) On Fig. 1.1, draw the speed-time graph for the falling feather. [2]
speed
m/s
6
0
0 1 2 3 4 5
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(ii) Determine the distance fallen by the feather.
distance = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2016 0625/41/O/N/16

3
(b) On Fig. 1.2, sketch the shape of a speed-time graph for the same feather falling on Earth.
speed
0
0 time
Fig. 1.2
[2]
(c) Explain the difference between speed and velocity. Include the words vector and scalar in
your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 0625/41/O/N/16 [Turn over

4
2 Fig. 2.1 represents the cross-section of an oil tanker in a river.
tanker
15 m river
water
Fig. 2.1
(a) The bottom of the tanker is 15 m below the surface of the water. The area of the bottom of the
tanker is 6000 m2. The density of the water is 1000 kg / m3.
(i) Calculate the pressure due to the water at the depth of 15 m.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the force due to the water pressure on the bottom of the tanker.
force = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) Deduce the weight of the tanker.
weight = ...........................................................[1]
© UCLES 2016 0625/41/O/N/16

5
(b) The tanker sails out onto a calm sea. The density of sea-water is greater than the density of
river water.
State and explain any change in the depth of the bottom of the tanker below the surface.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 8]

6
3 (a) A closed container holds a quantity of gas.
Explain, in terms of momentum, how molecules of the gas exert a force on a wall of the
container.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a glass tube containing mercury.
mercury
air h
Fig. 3.1
The mercury traps a fixed mass of air in the left-hand arm of the tube. The right-hand arm of
the tube is open to the atmosphere. The difference in mercury levels in the two arms is h.
(i) The pressure of the atmosphere on the surface of the mercury in the right-hand arm of
the tube is 760 mm Hg. The distance h is 120 mm.
Calculate the total pressure at level Q, in mm of mercury (mm Hg), due to the atmosphere
and the mercury above Q.
pressure = .............................................. mm Hg [1]
(ii) State the pressure exerted by the air in the left-hand arm of the tube.
pressure = .............................................. mm Hg [1]
© UCLES 2016 0625/41/O/N/16

7
(iii) Initially, the volume of air trapped in the left-hand arm of the tube is 12 cm3.
More mercury is poured into the right-hand arm of the tube. The volume of the trapped
air decreases. The temperature does not change. The difference in levels, h, becomes
240 mm.
Calculate the new volume of the trapped air.
volume = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]

8
4 (a) In an experiment, cold water is poured into a bowl made of an insulating material. The container
is placed in a draught-free room. After several hours, the volume and the temperature of the
water are found to have decreased.
Name and describe the process that causes the decrease in the volume of the water, and
explain why the temperature of the water decreases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) In a second experiment, using the same apparatus and the same initial amount of cold water
as in (a), an electric fan blows air over the top of the bowl.
Predict and explain how the results of this experiment compare with the results of the
experiment in (a).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) In a third experiment, the same initial amount of cold water as in (a) is poured into a metal
bowl. The metal bowl is the same shape and size as the bowl used in (a).
Compared with the experiment in (a), the decrease in temperature is less in the same time.
Explain why.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 0625/41/O/N/16

9
5 (a) Compare the arrangement and motion of the molecules in ice and in liquid water.
ice .............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
water .........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) An ice-hockey rink has an area of 1800 m2. The ice has a thickness of 0.025 m. The density of
ice is 920 kg / m3.
(i) Calculate the mass of ice on the rink.
mass = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The ice is at 0 °C. To form the ice, water at 0 °C was poured onto the floor of the rink and
then frozen. The specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.3 × 105 J / kg.
Calculate the energy removed from the water to form the ice at 0 °C.
energy = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

10
6 (a) (i) State a typical value for the speed of sound in air.
speed = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) State the range of frequencies that can be heard by a healthy human ear.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A sound wave in air has a wavelength of 22 mm.
Fig. 6.1 represents wavefronts of this sound. These wavefronts are successive compressions.
22 mm
Fig. 6.1
(i) Using your value for the speed of sound in (a)(i), calculate the frequency of the sound
wave.
frequency = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) On Fig. 6.1, draw dotted lines to represent three different rarefactions. [1]
(iii) State, in terms of both molecules and pressure, what is meant by a rarefaction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 0625/41/O/N/16

11
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a box ABCD.
A B
prism 1
ray of light
box
emergent ray
D C
Fig. 7.1
The box contains two identical glass prisms, one of which is shown. Light incident on prism 1
undergoes total internal reflection within the glass.
(a) (i) On Fig. 7.1, complete the path of the ray of light through prism 1. [2]
(ii) On Fig. 7.1, draw a second prism inside the dashed square, positioned so that the light
reflects inside the glass and emerges from the box as shown. Complete the path of the
ray. [2]
(b) Select the statements that correctly describe the necessary conditions for the light to undergo
total internal reflection. Tick two boxes.
The angle of incidence in the glass is less than the critical angle of light in the glass.
The angle of incidence in the glass is greater than the critical angle of light in the
glass.
The angle of reflection in the glass is equal to the angle of refraction.
The speed of light in the glass is greater than the speed of light in air.
The speed of light in the glass is equal to the speed of light in air.
The speed of light in the glass is less than the speed of light in air.
[2]
[Total: 6]

12
8 A battery is made up of 8 cells in series. Each cell has an e.m.f. of 1.5 V.
The battery is connected to one 8.0 Ω resistor for 40 minutes.
(a) Calculate the e.m.f. of the battery.
e.m.f. = ...........................................................[1]
(b) Calculate the energy transferred from the battery in 40 minutes.
energy = ...........................................................[4]
(c) Describe the energy changes that take place during the 40 minutes.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 0625/41/O/N/16

13
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a gardener cutting damp grass with a high-powered electric mower.
weather-proof
socket on wall damp grass
gardener
extension cable
with thin wires
electric
plug mower
excess length of socket designed

cable coiled up for indoor use cut in insulation
covered with tape
Fig. 9.1
The mower cable has thick wires appropriate for the current of the mower and the correct fuse.
This cable is too short, and so the gardener uses an extension cable with thin wires, intended for
use with a reading lamp. This cable has no fuse.
Discuss any dangers of the electrical arrangement shown in Fig. 9.1.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 4]

14
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a wire AB suspended on two supports so that it is between the poles of a strong
magnet.
The wire AB is loosely held so that it is free to move.
A B
S
support support
N
magnet
power supply
Fig. 10.1
Describe and explain any movement of the wire AB when there is
(a) a large direct current (d.c.) in the wire in the direction from A to B,
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) a large alternating current (a.c.) in the wire.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2016 0625/41/O/N/16

15
11 (a) State what is meant by
(i) an electric field,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the direction of an electric field at a point.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 11.1 shows a positively charged sphere.
Fig. 11.1
On Fig. 11.1, draw the pattern of the electric field in the region around the positively charged
sphere. Show the direction of the field with arrows. [2]
(c) The charge on the sphere in (b) is + 2.0 × 10–5 C. A high resistance wire is now connected
between the sphere and earth. It takes 20 minutes for the sphere to become completely
discharged through the wire.
(i) Suggest why there is a current in the wire between the sphere and earth.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate the average current in the wire between the sphere and earth.
average current = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]

16
12 The nuclear equation below shows the decay of a plutonium (Pu) nucleus to an americium (Am)
nucleus and a β-particle.
241 241
Z
Pu 95
Am +β
(a) (i) State the quantity that is represented by the letter Z in this equation.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the numerical value of Z.
Z = ..........................................[1]
(b) The americium nucleus decays by the emission of an α-particle into a neptunium (Np)
nucleus.
Complete the nuclear equation for this decay.

241
95
Am
[2]
(c) The half-life of this americium nuclide is 470 years. A sample of this nuclide contains
8.0 × 1014 atoms.
After some time, 6.0 × 1014 americium atoms have decayed.
Calculate the time required for this decay.
time = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
reasonable effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the
publisher will be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
Cambridge International Examinations is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of Cambridge Local
Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2016 0625/41/O/N/16

* 1 7 8 5 8 2 3 7 0 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

This document consists of 19 printed pages and 1 blank page.
DC (NF/AR) 116042/5
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a student travelling down a hill in an unpowered vehicle.
Fig. 1.1
Fig. 1.2 is part of the speed-time graph for the vehicle travelling down the hill.
8 C
speed
m/s
6
4 B
A
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
time / s
Fig. 1.2
(a) (i) State how the graph shows that the acceleration is constant between A and B.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the acceleration between A and B.
acceleration = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/O/N/16

3
(iii) Describe how the acceleration changes between B and C.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Use Fig. 1.2 to obtain an approximate value for the distance travelled by the vehicle in the first
10 s, as shown on the graph.
distance = .......................................................... [4]
[Total: 8]

4
2 (a) (i) State an expression for the kinetic energy of an object of mass m that is moving with a
speed v.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State and explain whether kinetic energy is a scalar quantity or a vector quantity.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows two fairground “bumper” cars.
stationary moving
empty car car
50 kg 2.5 m / s 200 kg
springs
Fig. 2.1
The car with passengers, of total mass 200 kg, is moving in a straight line. It is travelling at
2.5 m / s when it hits a stationary empty car of mass 50 kg.
After the collision, the empty car moves forwards in the same direction at a speed of 4.0 m / s.
For the car with passengers, determine
(i) its momentum when it is travelling at 2.5 m / s,
momentum = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) the speed and direction of its motion immediately after the collision.
speed = ...............................................................
direction: ...............................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/O/N/16

5
(iii) Fixed to the front and the back of the cars are large springs.
When the cars collide the springs compress.
The total kinetic energy of the cars after the collision is equal to the total kinetic energy
before the collision.
Describe the energy transfers that occur as the cars collide and then separate.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a mercury barometer correctly set up to measure the atmospheric pressure in
mm Hg (millimetres of mercury).
tube
mercury
dish
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) State what is in the space labelled P.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) On Fig. 3.1, mark carefully the length which gives the atmospheric pressure. [1]
(iii) The tube containing mercury is pushed further down into the dish.
State what happens, if anything, to the vertical distance between the mercury surface in
the tube and the mercury surface in the dish.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Another barometer is set up incorrectly. The space P contains some air which exerts a
pressure equivalent to 15 mm Hg. The true atmospheric pressure is 760 mm Hg.
(i) Calculate the reading of atmospheric pressure given by the barometer.
reading = ............................................. mm Hg [1]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/O/N/16

7
(ii) The tube is now pushed down into the dish so that the volume of the space P is reduced
from 12.0 cm3 to 4.0 cm3.
Calculate the new reading of atmospheric pressure given by the barometer.
reading = ............................................. mm Hg [4]
[Total: 8]

8
4 A small wind turbine drives a generator to provide electricity for an isolated village.
(a) The decrease in kinetic energy of the wind striking the turbine is 16 200 J every second. The
output of the generator is 23 A at 240 V.
Calculate the efficiency of the turbine and generator.
efficiency = .......................................................... [4]
(b) When electrical energy is not required, the generator charges batteries that then provide
electricity during periods of no wind.
State the term used to describe the energy stored in the batteries.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The use of wind turbines on a large scale has environmental and economic impacts.
Describe one environmental impact and one economic impact.
environmental ............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
economic ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/O/N/16

9
5 (a) State a comparison of
(i) the arrangement of the molecules in ice and in liquid water,
ice ......................................................................................................................................
liquid water ........................................................................................................................

[1]
(ii) the movement of the molecules of ice and liquid water.
ice ......................................................................................................................................
liquid water ........................................................................................................................

[1]
(b) The mass of the ice on an ice-hockey rink is 51 000 kg.
(i) The density of ice is 920 kg / m3.
Calculate the volume of ice on the rink.
volume = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) To form the ice, water at 0 °C was poured onto the floor of the rink and then frozen. The
specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.3 × 105 J / kg.
Calculate the quantity of energy removed from the water to form this ice at 0 °C.
energy = .......................................................... [2]
(c) The temperature of the ice is monitored by a thermometer made up of wires of two different
metals connected to a remote voltmeter. The junction of the two wires is embedded in the ice.
State the name of this type of thermometer.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

10
6 (a) (i) The pitch of a sound wave increases.
Tick one box to indicate the change that occurs.
amplitude decreases
amplitude increases
frequency decreases
frequency increases
[1]
(ii) The loudness of a sound wave increases.
Tick one box to indicate the change that occurs.
amplitude decreases
amplitude increases
frequency decreases
frequency increases
[1]
(b) Fig. 6.1 shows an astronaut and a spacecraft on the surface of the Moon, where there is no
atmosphere.
Fig. 6.1
A piece of machinery within the spacecraft produces a loud sound of frequency 12 kHz.
Tick the one box that indicates the reason why the astronaut cannot hear this sound.
The material of the space suit is soundproof.
Sound cannot travel through a vacuum.
Sound of frequency 12 kHz cannot travel through the air in the spacesuit.
Sound of frequency 12 kHz cannot be heard by any human ear.

[1]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/O/N/16

11
(c) Some training for space travel is carried out under water.
(i) State an approximate value for the speed of sound in water.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the wavelength in water of a sound wave of frequency 12 kHz.
wavelength = .......................................................... [2]
(d) Fig. 6.2 shows successive crests of a water wave approaching a narrow gap in a barrier.
direction of travel of wave
gap
barrier barrier
Fig. 6.2
On Fig. 6.2, draw three crests of the wave that have just passed through the gap in the barrier.
[3]
[Total: 9]

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/O/N/16

13
7 (a) In the space below, draw the circuit symbol for a thermistor.
[1]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows the connections between two logic gates.
A D
B
E
C
Fig. 7.1
Complete the truth table of this combination of logic gates.
inputs intermediate output

point
A B C D E
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
[3]
(c) In the space below, draw a truth table to show the action of a NOT gate.
[2]
[Total: 6]

14
8 A student draws a diagram to represent the electromagnetic spectrum.
Fig. 8.1 is the student’s diagram.
visible light
gamma-rays X-rays ultrasound infra-red microwaves earthquake

radiation radiation waves
increasing wavelength
Fig. 8.1
The student has made two mistakes.
(a) On Fig. 8.1, cross out what is wrong and correct the diagram. [2]
(b) The speed of light in an optical fibre is 2.0 × 108 m / s.
(i) State the speed of light in a vacuum.
speed of light = .......................................................... [1]
(ii) For light in the material from which the optical fibre is made, calculate
1. the refractive index,
refractive index = .......................................................... [2]
2. the critical angle.
critical angle = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/O/N/16

15
(iii) Fig. 8.2 shows a section of the optical fibre.
ray
optical
fibre
Fig. 8.2
Light is travelling in the optical fibre.
State the full name of the process that takes place each time the light changes direction.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

16
9 Fig. 9.1 is a circuit diagram.
60 1
55 1
30 1
Fig. 9.1
The circuit consists of three resistors and three identical 1.5 V cells.
(a) State the total electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the three 1.5 V cells in series.
total e.m.f. = .......................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate
(i) the combined resistance of the resistors in parallel,
resistance = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) the total resistance of the circuit,
resistance = .......................................................... [1]
(iii) the current in the 55 Ω resistor.
current = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/O/N/16

17
(c) The currents in the 30 Ω, the 55 Ω and the 60 Ω resistors are all different.
State the resistance of the resistor in which the current is
(i) the largest,
resistance = .......................................................... [1]
(ii) the smallest.
resistance = .......................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

18
10 (a) The size of the charge on an electron is e. Since the charge on an electron is negative, it is
written –e.
Complete the table by writing down the charges, in terms of e, on the particles and radioactive
emissions shown.
particle charge
proton
neutron
α-particle
β-particle
γ-ray
[3]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows a radioactive source emitting α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays into a vacuum
tube.
N pole of
vacuum
strong magnet
radioactive N
source
S
block of lead
with hole
S pole of
tube
strong magnet
Fig. 10.1
The block of lead ensures that the radiation is in a narrow beam when it passes between the
poles of the magnet.
State the direction of any deflection of
(i) the α-particles,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/O/N/16

19
(ii) the β-particles,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) the γ-rays.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

20
11 A radioactive nuclide has a half-life of 4.0 days. A sample contains 9.6 × 108 atoms of the nuclide.
(a) Calculate the number of atoms of the nuclide remaining after 12 days.
number = .......................................................... [2]
(b) The count rate from the sample is measured in a laboratory where the background count rate
is 16 counts / minute.
A detector is placed at a fixed distance from the sample. The initial count rate measured by
the detector is 160 counts / minute.
Calculate the count rate measured by the detector after 12 days.
count rate = .......................................................... [2]
[Total: 4]
Permission to reproduce items where third-party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every reasonable
effort has been made by the publisher (UCLES) to trace copyright holders, but if any items requiring clearance have unwittingly been included, the publisher will
be pleased to make amends at the earliest possible opportunity.
© UCLES 2016 0625/42/O/N/16

* 1 0 3 0 9 9 4 3 8 7 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/FD) 116044/8
2
1 A diver in the sea uses breathing apparatus, which releases gas bubbles.
Fig. 1.1 shows bubbles rising to the surface.
Fig. 1.1
The bubbles start from rest and, at first, they move upwards with a constant acceleration.
Fig. 1.2 is an incomplete speed-time graph for one of the bubbles from time t = 0 s until t = 10 s.
2.5
2.0
speed
m/s
1.5
1.0
0.5
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10
t/s
Fig. 1.2
(a) Using Fig. 1.2, determine the acceleration of the bubble during the first 2.0 s.
acceleration = .......................................................... [3]
(b) (i) After t = 2.0 s, the acceleration of this bubble decreases gradually until at t = 10 s its
acceleration is zero.
Complete Fig. 1.2, by sketching a possible continuation of the speed-time graph. [2]
(ii) State the name given to a negative acceleration.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 0625/43/O/N/16
3
2 Two mechanics, A and B, are trying to use a two-person spanner (wrench) to loosen a nut on a
large wheel.
Fig. 2.1 shows the forces exerted by the two mechanics.
wheel
nuts
two-person
spanner (wrench)
500 N force 400 N force

exerted by exerted by
mechanic A mechanic B
1.2 m 1.2 m
Fig. 2.1
Mechanic A exerts a force of 500 N at a distance of 1.2 m from nut P. Mechanic B exerts a force of
400 N at a distance of 1.2 m on the other side of nut P.
(a) Calculate the magnitude and the direction of the resultant moment exerted by the mechanics
on nut P.
magnitude of resultant moment = ...............................................................
direction ...............................................................
[4]
(b) Mechanic B reverses the direction of the 400 N force that he exerts on the spanner.
Mechanic A continues to exert the same force of 500 N downwards.
(i) Calculate the magnitude of the new resultant moment exerted by the mechanics.
magnitude of resultant moment = .......................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the magnitude of the resultant force now exerted by the mechanics on the spanner.
force = .......................................................... [1]

[Total: 6]
4
3 (a) (i) State how a vector quantity differs from a scalar quantity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State and explain whether momentum is a vector quantity or a scalar quantity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) A spacecraft of mass 35 kg is travelling in a straight line at a velocity of 1200 m / s. Assume no

external forces act on the spacecraft.
Calculate
(i) the momentum of the spacecraft,
momentum = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) the kinetic energy of the spacecraft.
kinetic energy = .......................................................... [2]
(c) The rocket fuel stored in the moving spacecraft in (b) explodes and the spacecraft splits into
two sections. One section speeds up and the other section slows down.
(i) State what happens to the total momentum.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Predict and explain what happens to the total kinetic energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 0625/43/O/N/16

5
4 A manometer containing a liquid X, is used to measure the pressure of a gas supply. Fig. 4.1
shows the manometer.
gas
supply
liquid X
Fig. 4.1
Atmospheric pressure is 9.9 × 104 Pa.
(a) The height h is 0.36 m. The density of liquid X is 840 kg / m3.
Calculate
(i) the pressure due to a column of liquid X of height 0.36 m,
pressure = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) the pressure of the gas supply.
pressure = .......................................................... [1]
(b) The pressure of the gas supply stays constant.
Describe what happens to the liquid levels when
(i) the liquid X is replaced by the same volume of a liquid of greater density,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) a manometer tube with a slightly smaller area of cross-section, containing an identical
volume of liquid X, is used.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
6
5 (a) (i) The temperature of a quantity of air is increased.
Describe the effect of this increase in temperature on the air molecules.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The temperature of a block of aluminium is decreased.
Describe the effect of this decrease in temperature on the density of the aluminium.
Explain your answer in terms of the separation of the atoms.
effect ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) A road is covered with a layer of snow. The temperature of the snow is 0 °C. The specific
latent heat of fusion of snow is 3.3 × 105 J / kg.
The snow forms a layer of uniform thickness on the road surface.
(i) Calculate the power needed to melt 0.12 kg of the snow in 220 s.
power = .......................................................... [4]
(ii) The snow is melted by solar radiation. In 220 s, exactly 0.12 kg of the snow melts to
produce water at 0 °C.
The power of the solar radiation incident on each 0.12 kg of snow is greater than the
power calculated in (b)(i).
Suggest one reason why this is so.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2016 0625/43/O/N/16

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows the crests of a wave in the sea as it reaches the entrance to a harbour.
sea harbour
harbour wall
gap
Fig. 6.1
(i) The wave reaches the gap in the harbour wall and passes into the harbour.
On Fig. 6.1, draw the first three crests to the right of the harbour wall. [3]
© UCLES 2016 0625/43/O/N/16

9
(ii) A wave with a larger wavelength approaches the harbour. Fig. 6.2 shows this wave.
sea harbour
direction of
travel of
wave
harbour wall
gap
Fig. 6.2
This second wave reaches the gap in the harbour wall and passes into the harbour.
On Fig. 6.2, draw the first three crests to the right of the harbour wall. [1]
(b) An earthquake produces two types of wave, P-waves and S-waves.
The vibrations in P-waves are parallel to the direction of travel of the wave.
The vibrations in S-waves are perpendicular to the direction of travel of the wave.
Place one tick for each type of wave, to indicate whether it is longitudinal or transverse.
type of wave longitudinal wave transverse wave

electromagnetic wave
P-wave
S-wave
sound wave
ultrasound wave
[3]
[Total: 7]

10
7 Some of the components of the electromagnetic spectrum, in order of decreasing wavelength, are
shown.
radio waves microwaves visible light ultraviolet radiation gamma rays
(a) (i) State the speed at which all electromagnetic waves travel in a vacuum.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State which of the components of the electromagnetic spectrum shown has the lowest
frequency.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Two components of the electromagnetic spectrum are not listed above.
State the names of these components.
1. ......................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) One application of microwaves is in microwave ovens, which cook food very quickly.
Fig. 7.1 shows the inside of the glass door of a microwave oven, covered with a metal mesh.
metal mesh
Fig. 7.1
The metal mesh prevents the microwaves from escaping by reflecting them back into the
oven.
(i) Suggest one reason why it is sensible to prevent microwaves from escaping.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State one further application of microwaves, other than in microwave ovens.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2016 0625/43/O/N/16

11
8 For blue light, the refractive index of a particular type of transparent plastic is 1.5.
(a) Calculate the critical angle for blue light in this type of plastic.
critical angle = .......................................................... [2]
(b) A block is made of this type of plastic. Blue light travelling in a vacuum is incident on the side
of the block at point P.
Fig. 8.1 shows that the angle of incidence is 45°.
45°
Fig. 8.1
At P, some of the light is refracted into the block and some of the light is reflected.
(i) The blue light used in this experiment is monochromatic.
State, in terms of a measurable quantity, what is meant by monochromatic.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the angle of refraction of the light in the block.
angle of refraction = .......................................................... [2]
(iii) On Fig. 8.1, draw the path taken by the light that passes into the block and the path of
the light that is reflected at P. [1]
[Total: 6]

12
9 A circuit consists of a 12 V battery, three resistors and a switch.
Fig. 9.1 is the circuit diagram.
12 V
28 Ω 20 Ω
24 Ω
Fig. 9.1
(a) The battery consists of 2.0 V cells in series.
State the number of 2.0 V cells in series in the battery.
number of cells = .......................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate
(i) the combined resistance of the two resistors in series,
resistance = .......................................................... [1]
(ii) the total resistance of the circuit.
resistance = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2016 0625/43/O/N/16

13
(c) The switch is closed.
Calculate
(i) the current in the 20 Ω resistor,
current = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) the charge that flows through the 20 Ω resistor in 6.0 minutes.
charge = .......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

14
10 A wire AB hangs loosely between the N pole and the S pole of a strong magnet.
Fig. 10.1 shows the arrangement.
power
supply B
Fig. 10.1
(a) The wire is connected to a power supply.
(i) When the power supply is switched on, there is a very large direct current (d.c.) in the
wire in the direction from B to A.
Describe what happens to the wire as the power supply is switched on.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The power supply is adjusted and there is now a large alternating current (a.c.) in the
wire.
Describe what happens to the wire.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2016 0625/43/O/N/16

15
(b) The power supply is removed from the circuit and a galvanometer is connected in its place.
(i) The wire is moved quickly to the right, between the poles of the magnet.
Explain why the galvanometer registers a current.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State what is observed on the galvanometer when the wire is moved to the left at the
same speed as in (b)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) State what is observed on the galvanometer when the wire is moved to the right at a
much lower speed than in (b)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

16
11 (a) State, using nuclide notation, the symbol for
(i) an iron (atomic symbol Fe) nucleus which has nucleon number 56 and proton number 26,
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) a platinum (atomic symbol Pt) nucleus which contains 78 protons and 118 neutrons.
...................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) A nucleus of plutonium-238 ( 238

94Pu) decays to a uranium (atomic symbol U) nucleus by
the emission of an α-particle.
Write down the nuclear equation that represents this radioactive decay.
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) The half-life of plutonium-238 is 90 years. A sample contains 9.6 × 10 10 atoms

of plutonium-238.
Predict the number of plutonium-238 atoms in the sample that decay in 270 years.
number of atoms that decay = .......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2016 0625/43/O/N/16

* 0 3 4 2 0 2 1 6 5 1 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LK/FD) 125811/7
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 shows the axes used to plot distance-time graphs.
distance
0
0 time
Fig. 1.1
On Fig. 1.1, draw graphs for an object that is
(i) moving with constant speed, labelling the graph A,
(ii) moving with decreasing speed, labelling the graph B. [2]
(b) Fig. 1.2 shows the axes used to plot speed-time graphs.
speed
0
0 time
Fig. 1.2
On Fig. 1.2, draw graphs for an object that is
(i) moving with constant acceleration, labelling the graph S,
(ii) moving with increasing acceleration, labelling the graph T. [2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/F/M/17

3
(c) A plane is at rest on an airport runway. The brakes of the plane are released and the engine
of the plane provides a constant accelerating force.
Using the following data, calculate the take-off speed of the plane. Ignore any resistive forces.
constant forward force = 56 000 N

mass of plane = 16 000 kg
time of travel along runway = 16 s
speed = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 8]

4
2 (a) Explain why momentum is a vector quantity.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The crumple zone at the front of a car is designed to collapse during a collision.
concrete wall
crumple
zone
Fig. 2.1
In a laboratory test, a car of mass 1200 kg is driven into a concrete wall, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
A video recording of the test shows that the car is brought to rest in 0.36 s when it collides
with the wall. The speed of the car before the collision is 7.5 m / s.
Calculate
(i) the change of momentum of the car,
change of momentum = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the average force acting on the car.
average force = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/F/M/17

5
(c) A different car has a mass of 1500 kg. It collides with the same wall and all of the energy
transferred during the collision is absorbed by the crumple zone.
(i) The energy absorbed by the crumple zone is 4.3 × 105 J. Show that the speed of the car
before the collision is 24 m / s.
[2]
(ii) Suggest what would happen to the car if it is travelling faster than 24 m / s when it hits
the wall.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

6
3 (a) A stationary object is acted upon by a number of forces.
State the conditions which must be true if the object
(i) does not accelerate,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) does not rotate.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a boat that has been lifted out of a river. The boat is suspended by two ropes.
It is stationary.
T1 T2
C P
1.20 m 0.40 m
24 kN
Fig. 3.1 (not to scale)
The weight of the boat, acting at the centre of mass, is 24 kN. The tensions in the ropes are
T1 and T2.
Determine
(i) the moment of the weight of the boat about the point P,
moment = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the tension T1,
T1 = ...........................................................[3]
(iii) the tension T2.
T2 = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/F/M/17
7
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a Galilean thermometer. This thermometer is used to measure the approximate
temperature of the surrounding air.
bulb E, label: 28 °C
glass cylinder bulb D, label: 26 °C

bulb C, label: 24 °C
bulb B, label: 22 °C
water
bulb A, label: 20 °C
Fig. 4.1
The glass cylinder contains water. When the temperature of the water changes, so does its density.
Each bulb has a label printed with a temperature, as shown in Fig. 4.1. The bulbs have different
densities. At 21 °C, only bulb A is at the bottom of the cylinder.
(a) Explain, in terms of density, why bulb A is at the bottom of the cylinder and the other bulbs are
floating.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The temperature of the surrounding air increases to a temperature above 23 °C.
(i) Suggest one reason why there is a delay before the temperature of the water increases
to 23 °C.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why, after this delay, bulb B sinks. Assume the bulbs do not expand.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) Bulbs A, B and C are now at the bottom of the cylinder. Bulbs D and E are floating.
State the possible temperature range of the water in the cylinder.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
8
5 (a) (i) State two ways in which evaporation is different from boiling.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Give one example of a change of state which does not involve boiling or evaporation.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The graph in Fig. 5.1 shows the variation of temperature with time for a substance that is
initially liquid.
temperature
A
B
time
Fig. 5.1
(i) State what is taking place at points A, B and C. You should say what changes of state, if
any, are taking place.
point A ...............................................................................................................................
point B ................................................................................................................................
point C ...............................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Suggest why the graph is steeper at point C than at point A.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/F/M/17

9
6 Fig. 6.1 shows apparatus that is used to demonstrate some effects of the transfer of energy by
radiation.
glass bulb
painted heater shiny
matt black glass bulb
glass tube glass tube
air air
liquid
Fig. 6.1
The glass bulb painted matt black, the shiny glass bulb and the spaces above the liquid in the tube
all contain air.
The heater glows red when switched on. The heater is the same distance from each bulb.
(a) State the two types of radiation that are emitted by the heater.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
[1]
(b) Before the heater is switched on, the liquid levels in the glass tube are the same.
State and explain any changes in the liquid levels that take place when the heater is
switched on.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 5]

10
7 Fig. 7.1 shows an object and its image formed by a converging lens. One ray from the tip of the
object to the tip of the image is shown.
Fig. 7.1 is drawn full size.
lens
object
image
Fig. 7.1
(a) Place a tick (3) in all boxes that correctly describe the image.
diminished
enlarged
inverted
upright
real
virtual
[2]
(b) On Fig. 7.1, draw a ray, passing through a principal focus of the lens, from the tip of the object
to the tip of the image. Label the principal focus F. [1]
(c) Use the ray you have drawn in (b) to determine the focal length of the lens.
focal length = ...........................................................[1]
(d) Draw another ray, not passing through a principal focus of the lens, that passes from the tip
of the object to the tip of the image. [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/F/M/17

11
8 (a) A transformer consists of two coils of wire wound on a core.
(i) Suggest the material from which the two coils are made. State the reason for using this
material.
material ..............................................................................................................................
reason ................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Suggest the material from which the core is made. State the reason for using this
material.
material ..............................................................................................................................
reason ................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 8.1 represents the system of transmission of electrical energy from a power station to a
home that is a long distance away.
132 kV
transformer X transformer Y
transmission
power cables and
22 kV 240 V
station pylons home
Fig. 8.1
(i) State the difference between transformer X and transformer Y.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Explain why a very high voltage is used for transmission over large distances.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(iii) Suggest why the voltage for use by a home consumer is 240 V, and not a much higher
value.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
12
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a graph of current against potential difference (p.d.) for a filament lamp.
0.80
current / A
0.60
0.40
0.20
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0
p.d. / V
Fig. 9.1
(a) State what happens to the resistance of the filament of the lamp as the p.d. changes
(i) from 0 V to 1.0 V,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) from 1.0 V to 8.0 V.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) At normal brightness, the p.d. across the lamp is 8.0 V.
Calculate, for normal brightness,
(i) the resistance of the lamp,
resistance = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) the power of the lamp.
power = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/F/M/17

13
(c) Five of these lamps, operating at normal brightness, are connected in parallel to a power
supply.
power supply
Fig. 9.2
Determine
(i) the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the power supply,
e.m.f. = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the current from the power supply.
current = ...........................................................[1]
[Total: 9]

14
10 (a) Describe, in terms of particles and the terminals of the battery, the movement of charge in an
electric circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows a lightning flash between a cloud and the ground beneath.
cloud
lightning flash
ground
Fig. 10.1
The charge built up on the cloud before the lightning flash is 0.60 C. This charge is completely
transferred to the ground by the lightning flash in 5.0 × 10–5 s (0.000050 s).
(i) Calculate the current between the cloud and the ground.
current = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The potential difference (p.d.) between the cloud and the ground during the lightning flash is
2.5 × 108 V.
Calculate the energy transferred during the lightning flash.
energy = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) Suggest what happens to the energy calculated in (b)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/F/M/17

15
11 A radioactive source is placed 20 mm from a radiation detector, as shown in Fig. 11.1.
lead
source
narrow beam detector
of radiation
20 mm
The initial count rate recorded by the detector is 150 counts / s.
A sheet of paper is placed between the source and the detector. The count rate recorded by the
detector falls to 60 counts / s.
With the paper still in place, a magnetic field is set up perpendicular to the direction of the radiation.
The count rate recorded by the detector falls to 20 counts / s.
The count rates have not been corrected for background. The background count is measured as
20 counts / s.
(a) State the evidence that each type of radiation is present in, or absent from, the radiation
emitted by the source.
α-particles .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
β-particles .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
γ-rays ........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[5]

16
(b) Determine how much of the original count rate of 150 counts / s, if any, is due to each type of
radiation.
α-particles ................................................ counts / s
β-particles ................................................ counts / s
γ-rays ................................................ counts / s

[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/F/M/17

* 8 0 5 8 1 5 8 7 1 3 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes

Take the weight of 1 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
DC (ST/JG) 129077/7
2
1 Fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph for an ice skater.
12
speed
m/s
10
0
0.0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0
time t / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Explain what is meant by deceleration.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Use Fig. 1.1 to determine
(i) the distance travelled between times t = 3.0 s and t = 6.0 s,
distance = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/M/J/17

3
(ii) the deceleration between times t = 3.0 s and t = 6.0 s.
deceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(c) (i) State what happens to the size of the deceleration after time t = 6.0 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State what happens to the resultant force on the skater after time t = 6.0 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/M/J/17 [Turn over

4
2 A footballer kicks a ball vertically upwards. Initially, the ball is stationary.
(a) His boot is in contact with the ball for 0.050 s. The average resultant force on the ball during
this time is 180 N. The ball leaves his foot at 20 m / s.
Calculate
(i) the impulse of the force acting on the ball,
impulse = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the mass of the ball,
mass = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) the height to which the ball rises. Ignore air resistance.
height = ...........................................................[3]
(b) While the boot is in contact with the ball, the ball is no longer spherical.
State the word used to describe the energy stored in the ball.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/M/J/17

5
3 Fig. 3.1 shows remote sensing equipment on the surface of a distant planet.
Fig. 3.1
(a) The mass of the equipment is 350 kg. The acceleration of free fall on the surface of this planet
is 7.5 m / s2.
(i) State what is meant by the term weight.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate the weight of the equipment on the planet.
weight = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The equipment releases a balloon from a point that is a small distance above the surface
of the planet. The atmosphere at the surface of this planet has a density of 0.35 kg / m3. The
inflated balloon has a mass of 80 g and a volume of 0.30 m3.
Make an appropriate calculation and then predict and explain the direction of any motion of
the balloon. Show your working.
prediction ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 7]

6
4 (a) A 240 V, 60 W lamp is connected to a 240 V supply. The lamp has a constant temperature.
State
(i) the rate at which the lamp transfers energy to the surroundings,
rate = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the names of the thermal processes by which the lamp transfers energy to the
surroundings.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows a thick copper block that has been heated to 400 °C. One side of the block is
dull black. The other side of the block is polished and shiny.
thermometer A thermometer B
copper block
dull black surface polished shiny surface
Fig. 4.1
(i) In Experiment 1, the thermometer bulbs are both painted black. They are placed at equal
distances from the surfaces of the block. The maximum temperature shown by each
thermometer is recorded.
Explain any difference between the maximum temperature shown by the two
thermometers.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/M/J/17

7
(ii) In Experiment 2, the thermometer bulbs are both shiny silver-coloured. They are placed
at the same distances from the surfaces of the block as in Experiment 1.
State and explain any differences that are observed in the maximum temperatures
shown by the thermometers in Experiments 1 and 2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Fig. 4.2 shows a firefighter wearing shiny silver-coloured clothing.
Fig. 4.2
State the benefit to a firefighter of wearing shiny silver-coloured clothing.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

8
5 Fig. 5.1 shows some gas trapped in a metal cylinder by a piston.
metal cylinder
piston
gas
Fig. 5.1
(a) The position of the piston is fixed. The cylinder is moved from a cold room to a warm room.
Explain, in terms of molecules, what happens to the pressure of the gas in the cylinder.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) The piston is now released. It moves to the right and finally stops.
Explain these observations in terms of the pressure and the volume of the gas in the cylinder.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/M/J/17

9
6 (a) A ray of light in glass is incident on a boundary with air.
State what happens to the ray when the angle of incidence of the ray is
(i) less than the critical angle of the glass,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) greater than the critical angle of the glass.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of light incident on a glass block at A. The critical angle of the glass
is 41°.
air
B
30°
ray of light
glass block
(i) On Fig. 6.1, without calculation, continue the ray from point B until it leaves the glass
block. [2]
(ii) Calculate the refractive index of the glass.
[Total: 6]

10
7 A loudspeaker produces a sound wave of constant frequency.
(a) State what is meant by frequency.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The sound wave travels in air towards a barrier with a small gap at its centre. Fig. 7.1
represents the compressions of the wave travelling towards the barrier.
gap barrier
direction
of travel
compression barrier
Fig. 7.1
(i) State what is meant by a compression.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The width of the gap is smaller than the wavelength λ of the wave.
On Fig. 7.1, draw the pattern of the compressions after the sound wave has passed
through the gap. [2]
(iii) The barrier is adjusted so that the gap becomes wider.
Describe how this affects the pattern of the compressions after the sound wave has
passed through the gap.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/M/J/17

11
(c) The frequency of the sound wave is 6800 Hz. The speed of sound in air is 340 m / s.
(i) Calculate the wavelength of the sound wave in air.
wavelength = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) State a typical value for the speed of sound in a liquid.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

12
8 A bar magnet is made of metal.
(a) Suggest a metal from which the bar magnet is made.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 8.1 shows the bar magnet being inserted into a coil of wire. The N-pole and the S-pole of
the bar magnet are marked.
movement coil
of magnet
S N
Fig. 8.1
The coil is connected to a galvanometer.
(i) Explain why the galvanometer deflects as the bar magnet is being inserted into the coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Explain what determines the direction of the reading on the galvanometer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Describe a method for demagnetising a bar magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/M/J/17

13
9 (a) The resistance of a circuit component varies with the brightness of the light falling on its
surface.
(i) State the name of the component.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Draw the circuit symbol for this component.
[1]
(b) Fig. 9.1 shows a 6.0 V battery connected in series with a 1.2 kΩ resistor and a thermistor.
1.2 kΩ
6.0 V
Fig. 9.1
(i) At a certain temperature, the resistance of the thermistor is 2.4 kΩ.
Calculate the reading on the voltmeter.
voltmeter reading = ...........................................................[4]
(ii) The battery connected to the circuit in Fig. 9.1 is not changed.
Suggest a change that would cause the reading of the voltmeter to decrease.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
14
10 (a) Describe the movement of charge that causes an object to become positively charged.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows a negatively charged rod held over an uncharged metal sphere.
negatively
charged rod
– – – – – – – – –
uncharged metal sphere
insulating support
Fig. 10.1
(i) On Fig. 10.1, add + and – signs to represent the results of the movement of charge
within the sphere. [2]
(ii) Describe the actions that must be taken to obtain an even distribution of positive charge
on the surface of the sphere.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/M/J/17

15
11 (a) A radioactive source is tested over a number of hours with a radiation detector. The readings
are shown in Table 11.1.
Table 11.1
time / hours 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
detector reading / (counts / s) 324 96 39 23 21 17 21 20 19 20 18
Use the readings to suggest a value for the background count rate during the test, and to
determine the half-life of the sample.
background count rate = ...............................................................
half-life of sample = ...............................................................

[4]
(b) Hydrogen-3 (tritium) has one proton and two neutrons. The nucleon number of tritium is three.
It decays by emitting a β-particle.
Complete the nuclide equation to show this decay. The symbol X represents the nuclide
produced by this decay.
........... ........... ...........

........... H ........... β + ........... X
[3]

16
(c) The arrows in Fig. 11.1 show the paths of three α-particles moving towards gold nuclei in a
thin foil.
gold nucleus
gold nucleus
gold nucleus
Fig. 11.1
On Fig. 11.1, complete the paths of the three α-particles. [3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/M/J/17

* 2 0 9 4 7 7 2 0 8 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (ST/JG) 129079/5
2
1 (a) (i) Speed is a scalar quantity and velocity is a vector quantity.
State how a scalar quantity differs from a vector quantity.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Underline the two scalar quantities in the list below.
energy force impulse momentum temperature [1]
(b) A boat is moving at constant speed.
On Fig. 1.1, sketch a distance-time graph for the boat.
distance
time
Fig. 1.1
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/M/J/17

3
(c) The boat in (b) is moving due west at a speed of 6.5 m / s relative to the water. The water is
moving due south at 3.5 m / s.
In the space below, draw a scale diagram to determine the size and direction of the resultant
of these two velocities. State the scale used.
scale ...............................................................
size of resultant velocity = ...............................................................
direction of resultant ...............................................................

[4]
[Total: 7]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a vehicle designed to be used on the Moon.
Fig. 2.1
The brakes of the vehicle are tested on Earth.

1
(a) The acceleration of free fall on the Moon is one sixth ( 6 ) of its value on Earth.
Tick one box in each column of the table to predict the value of that quantity when the vehicle
is used on the Moon, compared to the test on Earth.
mass of vehicle on weight of vehicle on deceleration of vehicle

Moon Moon on Moon with same
braking force
10 # value on Earth
6 # value on Earth
same as value on Earth
1
# value on Earth
6
1
# value on Earth
10
[3]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/M/J/17

5
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows the brake pedal of the vehicle.
pivot
piston
cylinder
7.0 cm
24 cm
link
oil force exerted
by driver
pedal
The driver exerts a force on the pedal, which increases the pressure in the oil to operate the
brakes.
The area of the piston in the cylinder is 6.5 # 10–4 m2 (0.00065 m2). The pressure increase in
the oil is 5.0 # 105 Pa (500 000 Pa).
Calculate the force exerted by the driver on the brake pedal.
force = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 7]

6
3 (a) Underline the pair of quantities which must be multiplied together to calculate impulse.
force and mass force and velocity mass and time
time and velocity weight and velocity force and time [1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a collision between two blocks A and B on a smooth, horizontal surface.
A B A B
3.0 m / s v
2.4 kg 1.2 kg
before collision after collision
Fig. 3.1
Before the collision, block A, of mass 2.4 kg, is moving at 3.0 m / s. Block B, of mass 1.2 kg, is
at rest.
After the collision, blocks A and B stick together and move with velocity v.
(i) Calculate
1. the momentum of block A before the collision,
momentum = ...........................................................[2]
2. the velocity v,
velocity = ...........................................................[2]
3. the impulse experienced by block B during the collision.
impulse = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Suggest why the total kinetic energy of blocks A and B after the collision is less than the
kinetic energy of block A before the collision.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/M/J/17
7
4 A balloon contains a fixed mass of gas.
(a) Explain, in terms of the momentum of molecules, how the gas in the balloon exerts a pressure.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Explain, in terms of molecules, why the pressure of the gas increases when the volume of the
balloon decreases. The temperature of the gas is constant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The initial volume of the gas is 500 cm3 and its pressure is 1.1 # 105 Pa. The volume is
reduced to 200 cm3. The temperature of the gas is constant.
Calculate the new pressure.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

8
5 (a) (i) An electric kettle contains 600 g of water at 20 °C. The heater in the kettle operates at
240 V. The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
The current in the heater is 12 A.
Calculate the time taken for the temperature of the water to rise to 100 °C.
time = ...........................................................[4]
(ii) State one assumption you made in your calculation in (a)(i).
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/M/J/17

9
(b) Using the apparatus shown in Fig. 5.1, describe an experiment to demonstrate good and bad
emitters of thermal radiation. Include the expected results and the conclusion.
You may use a diagram.
white
black side
side
metal water bottle 2 thermometers supply of hot water a ruler
Fig. 5.1
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 9]

10
6 (a) The graph in Fig. 6.1 represents a wave on a rope.
8.0
vertical
position / cm
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
distance along rope / cm
Fig. 6.1
Using Fig. 6.1, determine
(i) the amplitude of the wave,
amplitude = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the wavelength of the wave.
wavelength = ...........................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/M/J/17

11
(b) A wave travelling on the surface of water has a wavelength of 2.5 cm and a speed of 8.0 cm / s.
Calculate the frequency of the wave.
frequency = ...........................................................[2]
(c) The wave in (b) approaches a barrier that has a large gap in its centre.
Fig. 6.2 shows the crests of the wave viewed from above.
barrier
gap
direction
of wave
travel
wave crest barrier
Fig. 6.2
The gap in the barrier is larger than the wavelength λ.
(i) On Fig. 6.2, draw the pattern formed by three crests after the wave passes through the
gap in the barrier. [2]
(ii) Water is added to the tank and the speed of a wave in the deeper water is greater
than that in the shallower water. The frequency of the wave remains constant but its
wavelength is different.
1. State and explain how the wavelength in the deeper water has changed.
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
2. Apart from the change in wavelength, describe one other difference in the pattern
formed by the crests after the wave passes through the gap.
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
12
7 (a) The speed of light in air is 3.0 # 108 m / s.

The speed of light in a transparent liquid is 2.0 # 108 m / s.
A ray of light is incident on the surface of the liquid at an angle of incidence of 40°.
Calculate
(i) the refractive index of the liquid,
(ii) the angle of refraction in the liquid.
angle of refraction = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/M/J/17

13
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows a side view of an object at the bottom of a tank of liquid. Light travels slower in
this liquid than in air.
eye
air
tank
liquid
object
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1, draw two rays from the object into the air. Use these rays to locate the image.
Label this image I. [3]
[Total: 7]

14
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a 12.0 V power supply connected in a circuit.
12.0 V
resistance
wire
A X B
sliding
contact
The circuit includes a lamp and a resistance wire AB of constant cross-sectional area. There is a
sliding contact that can be moved between A and B.
(a) The rating of the lamp at normal brightness is 6.0 V, 9.0 W.
Calculate
(i) the current in the lamp at normal brightness,
current = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the resistance of the lamp at normal brightness.
resistance = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/M/J/17

15
(b) AB is 1.00 m long and has a resistance of 5.0 Ω. The lamp has normal brightness when the
sliding contact is at X.
(i) The sliding contact is moved to B.
Explain, without a calculation, why the lamp becomes dimmer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Calculate the distance AX for the lamp to have normal brightness.
distance AX = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 8]

16
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a horizontal wire PQ placed in the gap between the N pole and the S pole of a
magnet.
N S
Fig. 9.1
There is a current in the wire in the direction P to Q.

A force acts on the current-carrying wire in the magnetic field.
(a) On Fig. 9.1, draw
(i) an arrow, labelled M to show the direction of the magnetic field in the gap between the
poles of the magnet, [1]
(ii) an arrow, labelled F to show the direction of the force on the current-carrying wire due to
the magnetic field of the magnet. [1]
(b) State the effect of reversing the direction of the current in wire PQ.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The magnet is removed and the horizontal, current-carrying wire is left on its own, as shown
in Fig. 9.2.
Fig. 9.2
(i) On Fig. 9.2, sketch the pattern of the magnetic field due to the current in the wire.
Indicate the field direction. [3]
(ii) The current in PQ is increased.
State the effect of this change in current on the magnetic field.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/M/J/17

17
(d) A small magnet is placed at a point where the magnetic field is vertically upwards. State the
direction of the force on the S pole of the small magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

18
10 (a) In the space, draw the standard symbol for a light-emitting diode (LED).
[1]
(b) Table 10.1 shows the truth table for a logic gate.
Table 10.1

0 0 1
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0
State the name of the logic gate which has this truth table.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) It is possible to connect together the two inputs of the gate in (b).
Using two or more of the logic gates in (b), design a circuit with two inputs and one output
which has the truth table shown in Table 10.2.
Table 10.2
input 1 input 2 intermediate point, X output

0 0 0
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
(i) Draw your circuit in the space below.

There is no need to use the symbol for the logic gate. Boxes with the two inputs and one
output are sufficient.
[2]
(ii) Label an intermediate point of your circuit with the letter X. Complete the table with the
logic levels for this point in the blank column of the table. [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/M/J/17
19
11 (a) The arrows in Fig. 11.1 represent the paths of three α-particles moving towards gold nuclei in
a thin foil. The gold nuclei are shown as shaded circles.
Fig. 11.1
On Fig. 11.1, complete the paths of the three α-particles. [3]

20
(b) Fig. 11.2 shows a geologist holding a radiation detector near a rock.
radiation
detector
rock
Fig. 11.2
She holds the detector in a fixed position and records the readings shown in Table 11.1.
Table 11.1
time / minutes 0 1 2 3 4 5
detector reading
16 14 17 13 17 15
counts / minute
Explain the changes in the detector readings.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) A technician is handling a solid radioactive sample that emits α-particles and β-particles.
The technician wears thick rubber gloves.
Explain why this may provide some protection from the radiation, but it is not sufficient
protection.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/M/J/17

* 0 1 6 1 6 7 1 4 1 9 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (KN/JG) 129080/5
2
1 (a) Acceleration is a vector quantity.
Underline the two vector quantities in the list below.
energy force frequency impulse mass refractive index

[1]
(b) A car accelerates uniformly from rest at 2.2 m / s2 for 3.0 s.
(i) Calculate the speed of the car at time t = 3.0 s.
speed = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) At time t = 3.0 s, it has travelled a distance of 9.9 m.
Calculate the average speed of the car during the first 3.0 s of the journey.
speed = ...........................................................[1]
(iii) On Fig. 1.1, sketch a distance-time graph for the first 3.0 s of the journey.
10
distance / m
0
0 3.0
time / s
Fig. 1.1
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/M/J/17

3
2 (a) State the word equation that defines momentum.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A metal block A, travelling in a straight line at 4.0 m / s on a smooth surface, collides with a
second metal block B which is at rest. Fig. 2.1 shows the two metal blocks A and B before
and after the collision.
3.2 kg 1.6 kg
4.0 m / s at rest
before collision A B
1.5 m / s v
after collision A B
Fig. 2.1
The mass of A is 3.2 kg. The mass of B is 1.6 kg.

After the collision, the velocity of A is 1.5 m / s.
Calculate
(i) the momentum of A before the collision,
momentum = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the velocity v of B after the collision.
v = ...........................................................[3]

4
(c) In the collision that occurred in (b), block A and block B are in contact for 0.050 s.
Calculate the average force that is exerted on B during the collision.
average force = ...........................................................[2]
(d) After the collision in (b), the total kinetic energy of the two blocks is less than the kinetic
energy of block A before the collision.
Suggest one reason for this.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/M/J/17

5
3 A block of wood has a volume of 210 cm3 and a mass of 180 g.
(a) Calculate the density of the block of wood.
density = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The block is held just above the surface of a liquid of density 0.88 g / cm3.
Predict and explain what happens when the block is released.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 4]

6
4 In the braking system of a car, the brake pedal rotates about a pivot when the pedal is pressed.
Fig. 4.1 shows part of the braking system.
pivot
piston
cylinder
8.0 cm
22 cm
link
oil 200 N
pedal
The driver exerts a force of 200 N on the pedal at a distance 22 cm from the pivot. As the pedal
rotates about the pivot, a force is exerted on the piston and the pressure of the oil increases.
The area of the piston in the cylinder is 5.0 × 10 –4 m2 (0.00050 m2).
Calculate the increase in the pressure of the oil.
increase in pressure = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/M/J/17

7
5 A footballer and a referee are discussing a puddle of water that has formed on the pitch. The
footballer wears a white shirt whilst the referee wears a black shirt which, apart from its colour, is
identical.
Fig. 5.1 shows the two men looking at the puddle.
white shirt black shirt
puddle
Fig. 5.1
The weather is bright and sunny.
(a) State and explain how the temperature of the white shirt differs from the temperature of the
black shirt.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The volume of water in the puddle is slowly decreasing.
(i) Describe how two changes in the weather conditions could affect the rate at which the
puddle dries.
change 1 ...........................................................................................................................
effect ..................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
change 2 ...........................................................................................................................
effect ..................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

8
(ii) Explain, in terms of the water molecules, what happens as the puddle dries.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/M/J/17

9
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a child releasing a balloon filled with helium.
Fig. 6.1
The pressure of the helium in the balloon keeps the balloon inflated.
(a) Explain how the particles of helium produce this pressure.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) As the balloon travels upwards through the atmosphere, the volume of the helium increases.
The temperature of the helium remains constant.
(i) State an equation that relates the volume of the helium to its pressure.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

10
(ii) Fig. 6.2 shows how the air pressure in the atmosphere changes with the height above
ground level.
120
pressure
kPa 100
80
60
40
20
0
0 2000 4000 6000 8000
height / m
Fig. 6.2
1. Using Fig. 6.2, determine the pressure at ground level. Give the unit.
pressure = ............................................ unit = ......................... [2]
2. Using Fig. 6.2, determine the height at which the volume of the helium in the balloon
is twice the volume at ground level.
height = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/M/J/17

11
7 A loudspeaker is built into the side of a swimming pool. The loudspeaker produces sound waves
in the water of wavelength 0.25 m.
(a) (i) The frequency of the sound waves is 6.0 kHz.
Calculate the speed of the sound waves in water.
speed of sound waves in water = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) State a typical value for the speed of sound in air.
speed of sound in air = ...........................................................[1]
(iii) State and explain, for the sound produced by the loudspeaker, how the wavelength of
the sound in air compares with the wavelength of the sound in water.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Sound is a longitudinal wave.
Explain what is meant by a longitudinal wave.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The sound emerges from the loudspeaker through a gap. The sound diffracts as it passes
through the gap.
(i) State how the width of the gap affects the diffraction.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State how the wavelength of the sound affects the diffraction.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

12
8 Red light travelling in air strikes the curved surface of a semi-circular glass block at P.
Fig. 8.1 shows the ray of light.
O
red light
P air
30°
semi-circular
glass block
Fig. 8.1
The light travels in a straight line from O to Q.
(a) Explain why the light does not change direction as it enters the glass block at P.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The light travels in the glass to Q where it strikes the edge of the block at 30° to the normal.
The light then emerges into the air.
(i) The refractive index of the glass is 1.5.
Calculate the angle between the normal and the ray in the air after the light emerges
from the block at Q.
angle = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) On Fig. 8.1, sketch the path of the light in the air after it emerges at Q. [1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/M/J/17

13
(c) The direction of the light striking the curved surface of the glass block is changed. The angle
between the ray and the normal at Q gradually increases from 30° to 90°.
Describe what happens to the light that strikes the block at Q as this angle increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 8]

14
9 A 12 V battery is connected in series to a 24 W lamp and to a parallel pair of identical resistors X

and Y. Fig. 9.1 is the circuit diagram.
12 V
A B
Y
Fig. 9.1
The 24 W lamp lights at normal brightness when the potential difference (p.d.) across it is 6.0 V.
The lamp is at normal brightness.
(a) Calculate the resistance of the lamp.
resistance = ...........................................................[3]
(b) Determine
(i) the p.d. between A and B,
p.d. = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the combined resistance of the parallel pair of identical resistors X and Y,
resistance = ...........................................................[1]
(iii) the resistance of X.
resistance = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/M/J/17

15
(c) Resistor X is removed from the circuit in Fig 9.1.
Explain why the lamp becomes dimmer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]

16
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a transformer that consists of two coils P and Q, and an iron core.
iron core
coil P coil Q
200 turns 340 turns
Fig. 10.1
There are 200 turns on coil P and 340 turns on coil Q.
A 4.0 V a.c. power supply is connected to coil P.
(a) (i) Explain why there is a voltage between the two terminals of coil Q.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Explain why the core of the transformer is made of soft iron.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Calculate the voltage between the two terminals of coil Q.
voltage = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/M/J/17

17
(ii) A heater is connected to coil Q. The current in the heater is 3.5 A. The transformer is
100% efficient.
Calculate the current in coil P.
current = ...........................................................[2]
(c) A transformer is used to step up the voltage before electrical energy is transmitted over long
distances.
State and explain one economic effect of transmitting electrical energy at a high voltage.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 10]

18
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows equipment that is used to investigate the effect of a magnetic field on the
path of a beam of γ-rays.
thick lead plates

beam of γ-rays
γ-ray detector source of γ-rays
Fig. 11.1
A radioactive source emits γ-rays. The γ-rays pass through two small holes in thick lead
plates. Then the γ-rays pass through the shaded region and into the detector.
(i) Suggest the purpose of the two lead plates.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) A magnetic field, directed into the page, is set up in the shaded region.
State and explain what happens to the reading of the detector.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) State the relative ionising effects of α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays. Suggest an explanation
for the differences.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/M/J/17

* 2 9 3 9 1 8 7 0 1 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LK/SG) 133346/7
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for the motion of a car.
20
speed
m/s
15
10
0
0 10 20 30 40
time / s
Fig. 1.1
The mass of the car is 1200 kg.
(a) Calculate, for the first 20 s of the motion,
(i) the distance travelled by the car,
distance = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the acceleration of the car,
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) the resultant force acting on the car.
resultant force = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Describe the motion of the car in the period of time from 25 s to 40 s.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17
3
2 (a) State Hooke’s Law.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) For forces up to 120 N, a spring obeys Hooke’s Law.
A force of 120 N causes an extension of 64 mm.
(i) On Fig. 2.1, draw the force-extension graph for the spring for loads up to 120 N. [1]
150
force / N
100
50
0
0 20 40 60 80
extension / mm
Fig. 2.1
(ii) Calculate the spring constant k of the spring.
k = ...........................................................[2]
(c) A student makes a spring balance using the spring in (b). The maximum reading of this
balance is 150 N.
The student tests his balance with a known weight of 140 N. He observes that the reading of
the balance is not 140 N.
Suggest and explain why the reading is not 140 N.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

4
3 All the sides of a plastic cube are 8.0 cm long. Fig. 3.1 shows the cube.
8.0 cm
The mass of the cube is 0.44 kg.
(a) Explain what is meant by mass.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) (i) Calculate the density of the plastic from which the cube is made.
density = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The density of one type of oil is 850 kg / m3.
State and explain whether the cube floats or sinks when placed in a container of this oil.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) On the Moon, the weight of the cube is 0.70 N.
(i) Calculate the gravitational field strength on the Moon.
gravitational field strength = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

5
(ii) In a laboratory on the Moon, the plastic cube is held stationary, using a clamp, in a
beaker of the oil of density 850 kg / m3.
The arrangement is shown in Fig. 3.2.
clamp
cube
3.0 cm clamp
stand
oil
bench
Fig. 3.2
The lower face of the cube is 3.0 cm below the surface of the oil.
Use your answer to (c)(i) to calculate the pressure due to the oil on the lower face of the
cube.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

6
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a balloon filled with helium that is used to lift measuring instruments to a great
height above the Earth’s surface.
Fig. 4.1
(a) Explain, in terms of momentum, how the atoms of helium produce a force on the wall of the
balloon.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) At ground level, the pressure of the helium in the balloon is 1.0 × 105 Pa. The volume occupied
by the helium is 9.6 m3.
The balloon is released and it rises quickly through the atmosphere. The volume occupied by
the helium increases, but the temperature of the helium may be assumed to stay constant.
(i) Explain, in terms of the helium atoms in the balloon, why the pressure in the balloon is
smaller than at ground level.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the pressure of the helium when it occupies a volume of 12 m3.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

7
5 (a) A wave passes through a gap in a barrier. The wavelength of the wave is the same magnitude
as the width of the gap in the barrier.
Tick one box to indicate what happens to the wave.
diffraction and dispersion

diffraction only
dispersion only
refraction and diffraction
refraction and dispersion
refraction only
[1]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows six wavefronts of a wave travelling on the surface of deep water. The wave is
incident on a boundary with a region where the water is shallow.
boundary
direction
of wave
deep water shallow

water
Fig. 5.1
(i) On Fig. 5.1, draw the wavefronts of the wave in the shallow water where the wave travels
more slowly. [2]
(ii) The depth of the shallow water is now changed so that the speed of the wave in the
shallow water is 0.60 m / s. The speed of the wave in the deep water is 0.80 m / s.
The distance between successive wavefronts in the deep water is 1.4 cm.
Calculate the wavelength of the wave in the shallow water.
wavelength = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 7]

8
6 (a) The left-hand column of the table shows some possible speeds of a sound wave.
In the right-hand column, write down the medium in which a sound wave has this speed.
Choose from solid, liquid or gas.
speed of sound wave medium

m/s
1500
5000
300
[2]
(b) Fig. 6.1 represents a series of compressions and rarefactions of a sound wave.
Fig. 6.1
(i) On Fig. 6.1, mark, with the letters X and Y, the mid-points of two rarefactions. [1]
(ii) State, in terms of pressure, what is meant by a rarefaction.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Astronauts set up a mirror on the Moon’s surface. A laser beam is transmitted from the Earth’s
surface to the mirror and is then reflected back to Earth.
On a certain day, the time between transmitting the beam from a point on the Earth’s surface
and receiving the reflected signal at the same point is 2.56 s.
The speed of the laser beam is 3.00 × 108 m / s.
Calculate the distance between the Earth’s surface and the Moon’s surface.
distance = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

9
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a converging lens and its principal axis. The points labelled F are each a
principal focus of the lens.
F F
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1, draw two rays from the top of the object O, to locate the image of O.
Label the image I. [3]
(b) Underline three of the terms below to describe the nature of the image produced by a
converging lens used as a magnifying glass.
diminished enlarged inverted real same size upright virtual
[2]
(c) Fig. 7.2 shows the path of a ray of red light passing through a glass prism.
prism
air
Fig. 7.2
A ray of green light enters the prism along the same path as the ray of red light.
On Fig. 7.2, draw the path of the ray of green light as it passes through the prism and emerges
into the air. [2]
[Total: 7]

10
8 (a) Describe a renewable process by which electrical energy is obtained from the energy stored
in water. You may draw a diagram in the space.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Explain why the process described in (a) can be regarded as renewable.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain whether the Sun is the source of the energy stored in the water in (a).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

11
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit with three 1.5 V cells.
A H
C 3.0 Ω D
B G
E F
6.0 Ω
Fig. 9.1
(a) Calculate
(i) the total electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the cells,
e.m.f. = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the total resistance of the circuit,
resistance = ...........................................................[3]
(iii) the current in the 3.0 Ω resistor.
current = ...........................................................[2]
(b) State, using the letters in Fig. 9.1, how you would connect
(i) an ammeter to measure the total current in the circuit,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) a voltmeter to measure the potential difference (p.d.) across the 6.0 Ω resistor.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
12
10 (a) (i) Draw the circuit symbol for a diode.
[1]
(ii) State the function of a diode.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 10.1 shows the proposed system for charging the battery of an electric toothbrush.
battery
+ –
handle of
toothbrush
B
coil X
coil Y
230 V
base of
a.c.
charger
Fig. 10.1
The handle of the brush contains the battery and a coil X. The circuit from coil X to the battery
is not shown.
The base of the charger contains a coil Y, wound on an iron core, connected to the a.c. mains
supply.
To charge the battery, the handle is lowered so that coil Y is inside coil X.
Fig. 10.1 shows the direction needed for the charging current at the battery.
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

13
(i) On Fig. 10.1, complete the circuit from terminals A and B of coil X to the battery.
Include a diode. [2]
(ii) Explain how an alternating voltage is produced in coil X.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 7]

14
11 The radioactive isotope carbon-14 (146 C) emits β-particles as it decays.
(a) The decay of carbon-14 produces an isotope of nitrogen (N).
(i) State the nature of a β-particle and state where it is produced.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Complete the nuclide equation for the radioactive decay of carbon-14.
14 C ..... .....
6 ..... N + ..... β [3]
(b) The half-life of carbon-14 is 5700 years.
Explain what is meant by the term half-life.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) A workman operates a machine that uses β-particles to determine the level of liquid in a
plastic water bottle that is being filled.
Suggest why
(i) α-particles are not suitable for the same purpose,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) γ-rays are not suitable for the same purpose.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/41/O/N/17

* 7 6 6 4 1 9 6 2 9 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LK/SG) 133347/6
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a cylinder made from copper of density 9000 kg / m3.
Fig. 1.1
The volume of the cylinder is 75 cm3.
(a) Calculate the mass of the cylinder.
mass = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The gravitational field strength is 10 N / kg.
(i) Calculate the weight of the cylinder.
weight = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) State one way in which weight differs from mass.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

3
(c) Fig. 1.2 shows the cylinder immersed in a liquid.
liquid
2.7 cm
cylinder
The upper face of the cylinder is at a depth of 2.7 cm below the surface of the liquid.
The pressure due to the liquid at the upper face of the cylinder is 560 Pa.
(i) Calculate the density of the liquid.
density = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Explain why the cylinder does not float in this liquid.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

4
2 (a) An object is moving in a straight line at constant speed. A resultant force begins to act upon
the object.
State the ways in which the force may change the motion of the object.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) State one other effect a force could have on the object.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The mass of a car is 1400 kg. The car, initially at rest, is moved along a level road by a
resultant force of 3500 N. The car reaches a speed of 30 m / s.
(i) Calculate the average acceleration of the car.
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Calculate the time for which the force is applied.
time = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) State the name of a force which opposes the motion of the car.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

5
3 (a) State the name of a fuel that is burnt to produce large amounts of electrical energy.
Describe a process by which electrical energy is obtained from the chemical energy stored in
this fuel.
Name of fuel: ............................................................................................................................
Description of process: .............................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
(b) Explain why the Sun is the source of the energy stored in the fuel in (a).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Explain whether the process in (a) is renewable.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

6
4 A beaker contains water at room temperature. Fig. 4.1 shows the beaker placed on a tripod above
a Bunsen burner.
Fig. 4.1
The Bunsen burner is lit and the temperature of the water begins to increase.
(a) The water is evaporating.
(i) Describe one difference between evaporation and boiling.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State and explain what happens to the rate at which the water evaporates as its
temperature increases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

7
(b) After a few minutes, the water reaches its boiling point temperature. The water continues to
gain energy from the Bunsen burner.
(i) State what happens to the temperature of the water in the beaker.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The specific latent heat of vaporisation of water is 2.3 × 106 J / kg. After the water reaches
its boiling point, it takes 12 minutes for 0.095 kg of water to boil away.
Calculate the average rate at which energy is being supplied to the water by heating.
rate of energy supplied = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]

8
5 (a) Explain why houses in hot countries are often painted white.
Use ideas about the transfer of thermal energy in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) As a star approaches the end of its life, the amount of radiation emitted from it per second
changes.
The star cools down.

State any effect on the rate of emission of radiation.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

9
6 Fig. 6.1 represents wavefronts of a water wave on the surface of water approaching a gap in a
barrier.
barrier with gap
direction of travel
of wavefronts
Fig. 6.1
(a) The wavefronts to the right of the barrier spread out as far as the dashed lines in Fig. 6.1.
(i) State the name of the process of spreading out.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Draw four wavefronts to the right of the barrier. [2]
(b) (i) State the effect of increasing the width of the gap in the barrier.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State and explain the effect of decreasing the frequency of the water wave.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

10
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 is a diagram of a converging lens used to produce an image of an object. Each point
marked F is a principal focus.
object
F F
image
Fig. 7.1
Write down three terms that describe the image produced.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows a plane mirror, a point object O and an observer’s eye.
mirror
O eye
Fig. 7.2
(i) On Fig. 7.2, draw two rays from the object reflected to the observer’s eye. [2]
(ii) On Fig. 7.2, complete your drawing to determine the position of the image of the object O.
Label this image I.
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

11
8 Fig. 8.1 is a circuit diagram.
24 V
8.0 Ω 4.0 Ω
6.0 Ω
Fig. 8.1
Calculate
(a) the resistance of the circuit,
resistance = ...........................................................[4]
(b) the potential difference (p.d.) across the 8.0 Ω resistor.
p.d. = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

12
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 is a circuit diagram.
Fig. 9.1
(i) State the names of circuit components A, B and C.
component A .....................................................................................................................
component B .....................................................................................................................
component C .....................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) The circuit can be used to indicate a change in temperature.
State and explain what would be observed when the temperature changes from hot
to cold.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

13
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows a digital circuit.
X
C
Fig. 9.2
Complete column X of the truth table for this circuit. Use the blank column for your working.
A B C X
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 0
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 1
[3]
[Total: 9]

14
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a wire that carries a current into the page.
The circles on Fig. 10.1 show the pattern of the magnetic field around the wire.
Fig. 10.1
(i) On Fig. 10.1, draw an arrow on each circle to show the direction of the magnetic field. [1]
(ii) State why the spacing of the circles increases as the distance from the wire increases.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

15
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows an electric door lock.
The slot in the door contains an unmagnetised iron bolt attached to a spring.
The slot in the door frame is empty. This slot is surrounded by the coils of a solenoid.
In Fig. 10.2 the door is unlocked. The spring is not stretched.
door door frame
spring solenoid
unmagnetised
iron bolt
Fig. 10.2
In Fig. 10.3 the door is locked. The spring is now stretched.
Fig. 10.3
The bolt is initially in the position shown in Fig. 10.2.
Describe and explain what happens when
(i) the switch S is closed,
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[4]
(ii) the switch S is reopened.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
16
11 The radioactive isotope bismuth-210 (210

83 Bi) decays by β-particle emission to an isotope of
polonium (Po).
(a) Complete the nuclide equation that represents this decay.

210 Bi ..... .....
83 ..... Po + ..... β
[3]
(b) A radiation detector is placed on a bench in a laboratory where there are no artificial sources
of radiation. The detector is switched on.
In seven one-minute periods, the detector displays these readings.
24 22 25 25 21 20 24
(i) Explain why, in the absence of any artificial source, there are readings on the detector.
Suggest one origin of this effect.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Explain why the readings obtained are not all the same.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) The half-life of bismuth-210 is 5.0 days.

A sample of bismuth-210 is brought close to the detector and in one minute, the reading
displayed is 487. The equipment is left in the same place for exactly 10 days.
Predict the reading in a one-minute period at the end of this time.
reading = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2017 0625/42/O/N/17

* 1 1 5 9 1 9 5 4 8 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LK/SG) 133348/6
2
1 A truck accelerates uniformly along a straight, horizontal road. The mass of the truck is
2.0 × 104 kg.
(a) The speed of the truck increases from rest to 12 m / s in 30 s.
Calculate
(i) the distance travelled by the truck during this time,
distance = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the resultant force on the truck.
resultant force = ...........................................................[4]
(b) To maintain a uniform acceleration, the forward force on the truck must change.
Explain why.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a measuring cylinder that contains a coloured liquid.
cm3
100
90
80
70
60
50
40 h
30
20
X
10
0
Fig. 2.1
The measuring cylinder contains 82 cm3 of the liquid. The density of the liquid is 950 kg / m3.
(a) Calculate the mass of the liquid.
mass = ...........................................................[3]
(b) The height h of the liquid in the measuring cylinder is 0.094 m.
(i) Calculate the pressure due to the liquid at point X in Fig. 2.1.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]

4
(ii) The true pressure at point X is different from the value calculated in (b)(i).
Explain why.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) A small object is made of steel. It is placed level with the top surface of the liquid in the
measuring cylinder and then released. The object sinks in this liquid.
(i) Explain why the object sinks in this liquid.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Describe how the volume of the object can now be determined.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

5
3 Fig. 3.1 shows solar cells that use radiation from the Sun to generate electricity.
Fig. 3.1
(a) (i) State the name of the process which releases energy in the Sun.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) A reaction takes place in the Sun as energy is released.
Describe what happens in this reaction.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Apart from solar cells, there are other energy resources used on Earth for which the radiation
from the Sun is the source.
State the name of one of these energy resources and explain whether it is renewable.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) State two advantages and two disadvantages of using solar cells to generate electricity.
advantage 1 ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
advantage 2 ..............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage 1 .........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage 2 .........................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 9]
6
4 (a) The molecules of most liquids are, on average, slightly further apart than the molecules of a
solid.
State one other difference between the molecular structures of a solid and a liquid.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A glass tube passes through a stopper and into a glass flask. Fig. 4.1 shows that the flask is
completely full of a liquid and that there is also some liquid in the tube.
stopper
glass tube
glass flask
liquid
Fig. 4.1
The flask is immersed in a large beaker of very hot water. At first, the level of the liquid in the
tube falls, but after a short time it rises.
(i) Explain why, at first, the level of the liquid in the tube falls.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Explain why the liquid level in the tube stops falling and starts to rise.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

7
5 A silver spoon has a thermal capacity of 7.2 J / °C.
(a) Explain what is meant by thermal capacity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The silver spoon is dropped into a saucepan of boiling water. The internal energy of the
spoon increases as its temperature increases from 22 °C to 100 °C.
(i) Calculate the increase in the internal energy of the spoon.
increase in internal energy = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) State, in terms of the atoms, what is meant by internal energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The spoon is removed from the boiling water and immediately it begins to transfer energy to
the surroundings. The temperature of the surroundings is 22 °C.
On Fig. 5.1, sketch a graph to show how the temperature of the spoon changes with time
from the instant that it is removed from the water. [3]
100
temperature / °C
80
60
40
20
0
0 time
Fig. 5.1
[Total: 8]
8
6 Visible light is one component of the electromagnetic spectrum.
(a) (i) In the table, place a tick in the box next to the approximate value of the speed of light
in air. [1]
speed
m/s
3.0 × 1010
3.0 × 108
3.0 × 106
3.0 × 104
3.0 × 102
(ii) The frequency of a light wave is 4.8 × 1014 Hz.
Calculate the wavelength of this light in air.
wavelength = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Light is travelling in an optical fibre that is made of glass.
(i) The glass has a refractive index of 1.5.
1. Explain why the quantity refractive index does not have a unit.
........................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................[1]
2. Calculate the speed of light in the glass.
speed = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Describe one use of optical fibres in communication technology.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17
9
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a converging lens and its principal axis. The points F1 and F2 are each a
principal focus of the lens.
principal axis O
F1 F2
Fig. 7.1
An object O is placed between F1 and the lens.
(i) On Fig. 7.1, draw two rays from the top of the object O to locate the image.
(ii) The object O is moved to the left along the principal axis so that it is further from the lens
than F1.
Fig. 7.2 is a diagram of the new arrangement with the new image shown.
F1 F2
principal axis
image
Fig. 7.2
Underline three of the terms below that describe the image shown in Fig. 7.2. [2]

10
(b) Fig. 7.3 shows yellow light passing through a glass prism.
Fig. 7.3
Blue light enters the prism along the same path as the yellow light.
On Fig. 7.3, draw the path of the blue light as it enters, passes through and leaves the prism.
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

11
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows an uncharged conducting sphere on an insulating stand placed close to a
positively charged rod.
positively +
charged rod +
+
+ conducting sphere
+
+
insulating stand
Fig. 8.1
The rod and the sphere are not moved.
Describe how to charge the sphere using a wire connected to earth and explain whether the
sphere becomes positively charged or negatively charged.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a small black circle that represents a positive charge.
On Fig. 8.2, draw the pattern and the direction of the electric field in the region around the
charge. [2]
Fig. 8.2
(c) A charge of 7.0 C flows along a wire in 5.0 minutes.
Calculate the current in the wire.
current = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
12
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows the structure of an alternating current (a.c.) generator.
coil direction of
rotation
N S
slip rings
coil
voltage
output
Fig. 9.1
The coil completes one rotation every 0.020 s.
(i) Using the axes in Fig. 9.2, sketch a graph to show how the voltage output of the generator
varies with time during a period of 0.040 s. [2]
voltage
output
0
0 0.020 0.040
time / s
Fig. 9.2
(ii) On your graph in Fig. 9.2, mark a point labelled A to indicate a time when the coil is
vertical. [1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

13
(b) There is an alternating current (a.c.) in a horizontal wire that is buried in a wall. A builder must
miss this wire when drilling a hole in the wall.
The builder places an instrument against the wall that registers a reading when it is close to
the wire. The instrument includes a long coil (solenoid) S that has an iron core and a sensitive
voltmeter. Fig. 9.3 shows the circuit of the instrument close to the wire.
surface of wall
end view of wire
X
S V
alternating current
in wire
iron core
Fig. 9.3
(i) Explain why there is a reading on the voltmeter.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) State the name and the effect of the component labelled X in Fig. 9.3.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

14
10 (a) State the nature of γ-rays.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A nucleus of technetium-99 (99

43Tc) emits only a γ-ray.
State any effect of this on
(i) the proton number of the nucleus,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the nucleon number of the nucleus.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) In a laboratory a radiation detector displays a count rate of 16 counts / minute due to
background radiation.
(i) State what is meant by background radiation.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) A sample of a radioactive isotope is placed near to the radiation detector and a count
rate of 112 counts / minute is recorded.
After 18 hours, the count rate recorded is 28 counts / minute.
Determine the half-life of this isotope.
half-life = ...........................................................[3]
(d) Radioactive isotopes are stored in thick lead containers.
State two precautions to be taken when radioactive isotopes are used.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

15
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2017 0625/43/O/N/17

* 9 4 3 9 9 8 5 6 4 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

This syllabus is approved for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (SC/SW) 149762/5
2
1 (a) Define acceleration.
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time axes for the graph of the motion of a car.
30
speed
m/s
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(i) The car starts from rest.
From time = 0 to time = 15 s, the car has a constant acceleration to a speed of 28 m / s.
From time = 15 s to time = 32 s, the car has a constant speed of 28 m / s.
From time = 32 s, the car has a constant deceleration of 2.0 m / s2 until it comes to rest.
On Fig. 1.1, draw the graph, using the space below for any calculations.
[5]
(ii) From time = 15 s to time = 32 s, the path of the car is part of a circle.
For this motion, state
1. the direction of the resultant force on the car,
...........................................................................................................................................
2. what happens to the velocity of the car.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

3
2 (a) A force is used to move an object from the Earth’s surface to a greater height.
Explain why the gravitational potential energy (g.p.e.) of the object increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a train moving up towards the top of a mountain.
Fig. 2.1
The train transports 80 passengers, each of average mass 65 kg, through a vertical height of
1600 m.
Calculate the increase in the total gravitational potential energy (g.p.e.) of the passengers.
increase in g.p.e. = ......................................................... [2]
(c) The engine of the train has a power of 1500 kW. The time taken to reach the top of the
mountain is 30 minutes.
Calculate the efficiency of the engine in raising the 80 passengers 1600 m to the top of the
mountain.
efficiency = ......................................................... [4]
[Total: 7]

4
3 (a) Complete the statement by writing in the blank spaces.
The moment of a force about a pivot is equal to ......................................................................
multiplied by .......................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a horizontal rod of length 2.4 m and weight 160 N. The weight of the rod acts
at its centre. The rod is suspended by two vertical ropes X and Y. The tension in each rope is
80 N.
80 N 80 N
2.4 m
rope X rope Y
rod
160 N
Fig. 3.1
(i) State the name given to the point at which the weight of the rod acts.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the mass of the rod.
mass = ......................................................... [1]
(iii) The rod is in equilibrium.
Using data from Fig. 3.1, explain why.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [4]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

5
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a cold plastic spoon that has just been placed in hot liquid in a cup.
plastic spoon
hot liquid
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe, in terms of molecules, why the temperature of the whole of the spoon increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The plastic spoon is replaced by a metal spoon.
Describe an additional process by which the temperature of the whole of this spoon increases.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) The cup contains 150 g of liquid of specific heat capacity 4.2 J / (g °C). When the cold spoon is
placed into the hot liquid, the temperature of the liquid decreases from 80 °C to 56 °C.
Calculate the loss of thermal energy from the liquid.
energy loss = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]

6
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows the apparatus used to observe the motion of smoke particles that are in the air
in a box.
eye
microscope
air molecules
light and
smoke particles
Fig. 5.1
Light from a lamp enters the box through a window in one side of the box. The smoke particles
are observed using a microscope fixed above a window in the top of the box.
(i) The motion of a single smoke particle is observed through the microscope.
In the circle shown, sketch the path of this smoke particle.
[1]
(ii) Explain why the smoke particle follows the path that is observed.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

7
(b) A tennis player is practising by hitting a ball many times against a wall.
The ball hits the wall 20 times in 60 s. The average change in momentum for each collision
with the wall is 4.2 kg m / s.
Calculate the average force that the ball exerts on the wall.
average force = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 represents the electromagnetic spectrum.
visible light
radio waves microwaves A B C D
Fig. 6.1
State the radiation in each of the regions represented by A, B, C and D in Fig. 6.1.
A ................................................................
B ...............................................................
C ...............................................................
D ...............................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

9
(b) A source emits visible light.
Fig. 6.2 shows a ray of red light from the source incident on the face XY of a glass prism at
point S.
normal
i S
ray of
red light
Y Z
Fig. 6.2
The angle of incidence i of the ray is 35 °. The refractive index of the glass for red light is 1.5.
(i) Calculate the angle of refraction in the glass at S.
angle of refraction = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) On Fig. 6.2, draw the refracted ray at face XY and the ray emerging from face XZ of the
prism. Label this ray R. [2]
(iii) A ray of blue light follows the same path as the ray of red light incident on the face XY.
On Fig. 6.2, draw the path of this ray in the prism and emerging from the prism.
Label this ray B. [2]
[Total: 8]

10
7 (a) The speed of a light wave in air is 3.00 × 108 m / s. The refractive index of water is 1.33.
Calculate the speed of the light wave in water.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows parallel wavefronts of a light wave in air incident on a boundary with a
transparent plastic.
direction
of light wave
air
transparent
plastic
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1,
(i) draw the positions of the four refracted wavefronts in the plastic, [3]
(ii) draw an arrow to show the direction of travel of the refracted wave, [1]
(iii) label the angle of refraction r of the light wave. [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

11
8 (a) The lamp of a car headlight is rated at 12 V, 50 W.
Calculate the current in the lamp when operating normally.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(b) A car is driven at night.
In a journey, the total charge that passes through the 12 V battery is 270 kC.
(i) Calculate the electrical energy transferred.
energy = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) The fuel used by the car provides 3.6 × 104 J / cm3.
Calculate the volume of fuel used to provide the energy calculated in (b)(i).
volume = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]

12
9 Fig. 9.1 shows current-potential difference graphs for a resistor and for a lamp.
6.0
current / A
4.0 lamp
2.0
resistor
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0
potential difference / V
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) The potential difference (p.d.) applied to the resistor is increased. Tick the box that
indicates the effect on the resistance of the resistor.
resistance increases
resistance is constant
resistance decreases
[1]
(ii) The potential difference (p.d.) applied to the lamp is increased. Tick the box that indicates
the effect on the resistance of the lamp.
resistance increases
resistance is constant
resistance decreases
[1]
(b) The p.d. across the lamp is 6.0 V. Calculate the resistance of the lamp.
resistance = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

13
(c) The lamp and the resistor are connected in parallel to a 6.0 V supply.
Calculate the current from the supply.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(d) The lamp and the resistor are connected in series to another power supply. The current in
the circuit is 4.0 A.
Calculate the total p.d. across the lamp and the resistor.
p.d. = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

14
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a straight wire AB placed in the magnetic field between the poles of a magnet.
The ends of AB are connected to a galvanometer.
N S
Fig. 10.1
When AB is moved vertically, the needle of the galvanometer shows a deflection.
State three factors that affect the size of the deflection.
1 ...............................................................................................................................................
2 ...............................................................................................................................................
3 ...............................................................................................................................................
[3]
240 V P S 12 V
Fig. 10.2
(i) The primary coil P has 8000 turns and an input of 240 V. The secondary coil S has an
output of 12 V.
Calculate the number of turns in the secondary coil.
number = ......................................................... [2]

© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18
15
(ii) A circuit containing a resistor is connected to the terminals A and B.

A direct current (d.c.) is required in this resistor.
On Fig. 10.2, draw this circuit. [1]
[Total: 6]

16
11 (a) To ensure the safety of workers in laboratories where radioactive sources are used, describe
how radioactive materials
(i) should be stored,
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) should be handled.
...........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Complete the table below for three types of emission from radioactive sources.
type of emission nature range in air absorbed by
electromagnetic radiation several km
helium nucleus 0.2 mm paper
electron
[3]
(c) State the type of radiation emitted when
an americium nucleus ( Am) decays into a neptunium nucleus ( Np),

241 237
(i) 95 93
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
a phosphorus nucleus ( 15 P) decays into a silicon nucleus ( 16 Si).

32 32
(ii)
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/F/M/18

* 5 4 9 8 1 5 2 3 9 1 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CE/SW) 150767/5
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for a vehicle accelerating from rest.
30
speed 25
m/s
20
15
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Calculate the acceleration of the vehicle at time = 30 s.
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Without further calculation, state how the acceleration at time = 100 s compares to the
acceleration at time = 10 s. Suggest, in terms of force, a reason why any change has taken
place.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(c) Determine the distance travelled by the vehicle between time = 120 s and time = 160 s.
distance = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a fork-lift truck lifting a box.
box
Fig. 2.1
The electric motor that drives the lifting mechanism is powered by batteries.
(a) State the form of the energy stored in the batteries.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The lifting mechanism raises a box of mass 32 kg through a vertical distance of 2.5 m in 5.4 s.
(i) Calculate the gravitational potential energy gained by the box.
gravitational potential energy = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The efficiency of the lifting mechanism is 0.65 (65%).
Calculate the input power to the lifting mechanism.
input power = ...........................................................[3]
(c) The batteries are recharged from a mains voltage supply that is generated in an oil-fired
power station.
By comparison with a wind farm, state one advantage and one disadvantage of running a
power station using oil.
advantage .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage ............................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

4
3 A rectangular container has a base of dimensions 0.12 m × 0.16 m. The container is filled with a
liquid. The mass of the liquid in the container is 4.8 kg.
(a) Calculate
(i) the weight of liquid in the container,
weight = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the pressure due to the liquid on the base of the container.
pressure = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Explain why the total pressure on the base of the container is greater than the value calculated
in (a)(ii).
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) The depth of liquid in the container is 0.32 m.
Calculate the density of the liquid.
density = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

5
4 (a) Describe the movement of the molecules in
(i) a solid,
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) a gas.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A closed box contains gas molecules.
Explain, in terms of momentum, how the molecules exert a pressure on the walls of the box.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 7]

6
5 (a) A ray of light in air is incident on a glass block. The light changes direction.
State
(i) the name of this effect,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the cause of this effect.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 5.1, drawn to full scale, shows a thin converging lens of focal length 3.5 cm.
1.0 cm lens
1.0 cm
Fig. 5.1
(i) On Fig. 5.1, mark each of the two principal focuses and label each with the letter F. [1]
(ii) An object O of height 4.4 cm is placed a distance of 7.5 cm from the lens.
On Fig. 5.1, draw rays from the tip of the object O to locate the image. Draw and label
the image. [3]
(iii) Determine the height of the image.
height of the image = ...........................................................[1]
(iv) State and explain whether the image is real or virtual.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18
7
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows wavefronts approaching a gap in a barrier.
wavefront
barrier
Fig. 6.1
(i) On Fig. 6.1, draw three wavefronts to the right of the barrier. [2]
(ii) Fig. 6.2 shows the gap in the barrier increased to five times the gap in Fig. 6.1.
wavefront
barrier
Fig. 6.2
On Fig. 6.2, draw three wavefronts to the right of the barrier. [2]

8
(b) Describe, with a labelled diagram, an experiment using water waves that shows the reflection
of wavefronts that occur at a straight barrier.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

10
7 (a) State, in terms of their structure, why metals are good conductors of electricity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A cylindrical metal wire W1, of length l and cross-sectional area A, has a resistance of 16 Ω.
l
A second cylindrical wire W2 having length 2 and cross-sectional area 2 A, is made from the
same metal.
Determine
(i) the resistance of W2,
resistance of W2 = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the effective resistance of W1 and W2 when connected in parallel.
resistance of parallel pair = ...........................................................[2]
(c) The parallel pair of resistors in (b)(ii) is connected to a battery that is made from three cells in
series, each of electromotive force (e.m.f.) E. There is a current in each resistor.
(i) State the e.m.f. of the battery.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The current in the battery is IB, the current in W1 is I1 and the current in W2 is I2.
Place a tick (3) in one box to indicate how these three currents are related.
I1 > I2 > IB
I1 > IB > I2
I2 > I1 > IB
I2 > IB > I1
IB > I1 > I2
IB > I2 > I1
I1 = I2 = IB
[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

11
8 In a laboratory at normal room temperature, 200 g of water is poured into a beaker. A thermometer
placed in the water has a reading of 22 °C.
Small pieces of ice at 0 °C are added to the water one by one. The mixture is stirred after each
addition until the ice has melted. This process is continued until the temperature recorded by the
thermometer is 0 °C.
The total mass of ice added to the water is found to be 60 g.
(a) The specific heat capacity of water is 4.2 J/(g °C).
Calculate the thermal energy lost by the water originally in the beaker.
thermal energy = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Assume that all the thermal energy lost by the water originally in the beaker is transferred to
the ice.
Calculate the specific latent heat of fusion of ice.
specific latent heat of fusion of ice = ...........................................................[2]
(c) Suggest a reason for any inaccuracy in the value of the specific latent heat of fusion of ice
calculated in (b). Assume the temperature readings and the values for the mass of the water
and the mass of the ice are accurate.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 5]

12
9 (a) A student wants to demagnetise a permanent bar magnet. She suggests these steps:
1. Place the magnet in a long coil.

2. Switch on a large alternating current in the coil.
3. Switch off the current.
4. Remove the bar from the coil.
State and explain whether the steps will always be able to demagnetise the magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) (i) Fig. 9.1 shows a coil supplied with current using a split-ring commutator.
coil
magnet
S
N split-ring
carbon brush
battery
Fig. 9.1
State and explain any motion of the coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

13
(ii) The coil in Fig. 9.1 consists of three turns of wire. The magnetic field strength of the
magnet is M. With a current of 2.0 A in the coil, the coil experiences a turning effect T.
The first row of Table 9.1 shows this data.
Table 9.1
magnetic field
number of turns current in the coil / A turning effect
strength
3 2.0 M T
3 8.0 M
6 2.0 M
M
3 2.0 2
Complete Table 9.1 to give the turning effect for the changes made to the arrangement
shown in Fig. 9.1. Choose your answers from the box.
T T T
8 4 2 T 2T 4T 8T
[3]
[Total: 9]

14
10 (a) Explain why the voltage of the supply to the primary coil of a transformer must be alternating.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
A
240 V 8000
mains turns
Fig. 10.1
There are 8000 turns in the primary coil of the transformer. The primary coil is connected to a
240 V mains supply. A 6.0 V lamp connected to the secondary coil operates at full brightness.
(i) Calculate the number of turns in the secondary coil,
number of turns = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The current in the lamp is 2.0 A. The transformer operates with 100% efficiency.
Calculate the current in the primary circuit.
current = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) The primary circuit contains a 2 A fuse.
Calculate the maximum number of lamps, identical to the lamp in (ii), that can be
connected in parallel in the secondary circuit without blowing the fuse.
number of lamps = ...........................................................[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18
15
222
11 Radon-222 is radioactive. It can be represented as 86
Rn.
(a) For a neutral atom of radon-222, state
1. the number of protons, ...........................
2. the number of neutrons, ...........................
3. the number of electrons. ...........................

[2]
(b) A radon-222 nucleus decays by α-particle emission to a polonium (Po) nucleus.
Complete the equation for the decay of radon-222.
222
86
Rn [2]
(c) Radon-222 has a half-life of 3.8 days.
At a certain time, a sample contains 6.4 × 106 radon nuclei.
Calculate the number of α-particles emitted by the radon nuclei in the following 7.6 days.
number = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/M/J/18

* 0 9 3 9 7 7 2 1 6 1 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CE/SW) 150768/5
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 shows the axes of a distance-time graph for an object moving in a straight line.
80
distance / m
60
40
20
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(i) 1. On Fig. 1.1, draw between time = 0 and time = 10 s, the graph for an object moving
with a constant speed of 5.0 m / s. Start your graph at distance = 0 m.
2. State the property of the graph that represents speed.
....................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Between time = 10 s and time = 20 s the object accelerates. The speed at time = 20 s is
9.0 m / s.
Calculate the average acceleration between time = 10 s and time = 20 s.
acceleration = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

3
(b) Fig. 1.2 shows the axes of a speed-time graph for a different object.
50
speed
m/s
40
30
20
10
0
0 20 40 60 80 100
time / s
Fig. 1.2
(i) The object has an initial speed of 50 m / s and decelerates uniformly at 0.35 m / s2 for
100 s.
On Fig. 1.2, draw the graph to represent the motion of the object. [2]
(ii) Calculate the distance travelled by the object from time = 0 to time = 100 s.
distance = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 9]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a hollow metal cylinder containing air, floating in the sea.
surface
of sea air
1.8 m
1.2 m
seawater
bottom
Fig. 2.1
(a) The density of the metal used to make the cylinder is greater than the density of seawater.
Explain why the cylinder floats.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The cylinder has a length of 1.8 m. It floats with 1.2 m submerged in the sea. The bottom of
the cylinder has an area of cross-section of 0.80 m2.
The density of seawater is 1020 kg / m3. Calculate the force exerted on the bottom of the
cylinder due to the depth of the seawater.
force = ...........................................................[4]
(c) Deduce the weight of the cylinder. Explain your answer.
weight = ...............................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18
5
3 Fig. 3.1 shows an aircraft on the deck of an aircraft carrier.
Fig. 3.1
The aircraft accelerates from rest along the deck. At take-off, the aircraft has a speed of 75 m / s.
The mass of the aircraft is 9500 kg.
(a) Calculate the kinetic energy of the aircraft at take-off.
kinetic energy = ...........................................................[3]
(b) On an aircraft carrier, a catapult provides an accelerating force on the aircraft. The catapult
provides a constant force for a distance of 150 m along the deck.
Calculate the resultant force on the aircraft as it accelerates. Assume that all of the kinetic
energy at take-off is from the work done on the aircraft by the catapult.
force = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 5]

6
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 represents an atom.
Fig. 4.1
Representing atoms by circles approximately the same size as in Fig. 4.1, sketch
(i) on Fig. 4.2, the arrangement of atoms in a crystalline solid, [1]
(ii) on Fig. 4.3, the arrangement of atoms in a gas. [1]
solid gas
Fig. 4.2 Fig. 4.3
(b) (i) Describe the motion of the atoms in a solid.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) A sculptor makes a statue from a block of crystalline rock using a cutting tool. Explain
why he must apply a large force to the tool to remove a small piece of rock.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) A helium-filled balloon in the room of a house suddenly bursts.
State and explain, in terms of atoms, what happens to the helium from the balloon after the
balloon has burst.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

7
5 A student wants to investigate good and bad absorbers of thermal radiation. She has the apparatus
shown in Fig. 5.1, a supply of cold water and a metre rule.
small polished small 2 thermometers electric heater

can black-painted
can
Fig. 5.1
Explain how the student could use the apparatus she has available to carry out her investigation.
Describe the results she would expect to obtain. Draw a diagram of the set-up.
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
......................................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 4]

8
6 (a) Circle two of the following that apply to an ultrasound wave travelling in air.
frequency 3.5 Hz frequency 350 Hz frequency 35 000 Hz longitudinal
transverse speed 1.5 m / s speed 1.5 × 103 m / s speed 1.5 × 106 m / s
[2]
(b) Calculate the wavelength in a vacuum of X-rays of frequency 1.3 × 1017 Hz.
wavelength = ...........................................................[3]
(c) A dentist takes an X-ray photograph of a patient’s teeth. Explain why it is safe for the patient
to be close to the source of X-rays, but the dentist must stand away from the source.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(d) State, with a reason, why microwave ovens are designed only to work with the door closed.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

10
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light in water that is incident on a submerged, transparent plastic
block.
water
plastic
Fig. 7.1
State what happens to the speed of light as it enters the plastic block. Explain your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows the two principal focuses F1 and F2 of a thin converging lens.
F1 F2
O
lens
1.0 cm
1.0 cm
Fig. 7.2
Fig. 7.2 also shows an object O of height 1.2 cm placed close to the lens. Two rays from the
tip of the object O are incident on the lens.
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

11
(i) On Fig. 7.2, continue the paths of these two rays for a further distance of at least 5 cm.
[2]
(ii) Using your answer to (b)(i), find and mark on Fig. 7.2 the image I of object O and label
this image. [2]
(iii) Determine the height of image I.
height = ...........................................................[1]
(iv) State and explain whether I is a real image or a virtual image.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

12
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit that contains a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 6.0 V, an ammeter, a
20 Ω resistor and component X.
6.0 V
A X
20 Ω
Fig. 8.1
(a) (i) State the name of component X.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The potential difference (p.d.) across the 20 Ω resistor is measured with a voltmeter.
On Fig. 8.1, draw the symbol for this voltmeter connected to the circuit. [1]
(b) The p.d. across the 20 Ω resistor is varied from zero to 6.0 V. For each value of p.d. a
corresponding current is measured.
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

13
On Fig. 8.2, draw a line to indicate how the current measured by the ammeter depends on
the p.d. across the 20 Ω resistor.
0.40
current / A
0.30
0.20
0.10
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
p.d. / V
Fig. 8.2 [3]
(c) A second resistor is connected into the circuit in parallel with the 20 Ω resistor.
(i) State how the combined resistance of the two resistors in parallel compares with the
resistance of each of the resistors on its own.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The p.d. across the two parallel resistors is changed and the current in the battery for
each value of the p.d. is measured. A second line could be drawn on Fig. 8.2 to indicate
how the current measured by the ammeter depends on the p.d. across the two resistors
in parallel.
State how the second line differs from the original line. You are not expected to draw this
second line.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]

14
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows a coil ABCD with two turns. The coil is in a magnetic field.
B C
N S
A D
Fig. 9.1
When there is a current in the coil, the coil experiences a turning effect.
(i) Explain why there is a turning effect.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The value of the current is 3 A. Place one tick in each column of the table to indicate how
the turning effect changes with the change described.
turning effect number of turns on coil current strength of magnetic

increased to six increased to 9 A field decreased by a
factor of 2
decreased by factor of 4
no change
increased by factor of 2
[3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

15
(b) Fig. 9.2 shows a magnet held just below a vertical coil connected to a galvanometer.
Fig. 9.2
The magnet is released.
(i) State any effect on the galvanometer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State any effect on the magnetic field produced by the coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

16
10 (a) An uncharged conducting metal plate rests on insulating supports. Fig. 10.1 shows the plate
and a positively charged insulating plastic sheet placed on top of the metal plate.
plastic sheet
metal plate
insulating support insulating support
Fig. 10.1
(i) Describe any flow of charge that takes place when the plastic sheet is placed onto the
metal plate.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) On Fig. 10.1, draw how charges are now arranged within the metal plate. [1]
(iii) State and explain if this arrangement of charge helps to keep the plastic sheet in place.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

17
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows two uncharged conducting spheres suspended on insulating threads.
Fig. 10.2
1. The spheres are now both given positive charges. On Fig. 10.2, draw a possible position
of each sphere and thread.
2. Explain the positions you have drawn.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]

18
11 (a) A radioactive nucleus of uranium-235 decays to a nucleus of thorium and emits an α-particle.
Complete the equation.
235 ....... 4
92 U .......
Th + 2α
[2]
(b) A nucleus of uranium-235 undergoes nuclear fission in a reactor.
(i) State what is meant by nuclear fission.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest why a nuclear reactor is surrounded by thick concrete walls.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) State one environmental advantage and one environmental disadvantage of using a
fission reactor to generate electrical energy in a power station.
advantage .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
disadvantage .....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) The thorium produced by the decay in (a) is also radioactive and has a half-life of 26 hours.
At a certain time, a pure sample of this isotope initially contains 4.8 × 109 atoms.
Calculate the number of atoms of this sample that decay in the following 52 hours.
number = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/M/J/18

* 5 7 1 8 2 9 1 8 0 4 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (LEG/SG) 152968/4
2
1 There is no atmosphere on the Moon.
A space probe is launched from the surface of the Moon. Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph of
the space probe.
5000
speed
m/s
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0 100 200 300
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Determine the acceleration of the space probe at time = 0.
acceleration = ...........................................................[3]
(b) Between time = 0 and time = 150 s, the acceleration of the space probe changes.
(i) Without calculation, state how the graph shows this.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

3
(ii) During this time, the thrust exerted on the space probe by the motor remains constant.
State one possible reason why the acceleration changes in the way shown by Fig. 1.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) Calculate the distance travelled by the space probe from time = 200 s to time = 300 s.
distance = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 8]

4
2 A rifle fires a bullet of mass 0.020 kg vertically upwards through the air. As it leaves the rifle, the
speed of the bullet is 350 m / s.
(a) Calculate
(i) the kinetic energy of the bullet as it leaves the rifle,
kinetic energy = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) the maximum possible height that the bullet can reach.
maximum height = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The actual height reached by the bullet is less than the value calculated in (a)(ii).
(i) Explain, in terms of the forces acting on the bullet, why this is so.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) As the bullet rises through the air, its kinetic energy decreases.
State what happens to this energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

5
3 On a particular day, the atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa. A bubble of gas forms at a point
5.0 m below the surface of a lake. The density of water is 1000 kg / m3.
(a) Determine
(i) the total pressure at a depth of 5.0 m in the water,
pressure = ...........................................................[3]
(ii) the pressure of the gas in the bubble.
pressure = ...........................................................[1]
(b) As the bubble rises to the surface, the mass of gas in the bubble stays constant. The
temperature of the water in the lake is the same throughout.
Explain why the bubble rises to the surface and why its volume increases as it rises.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 7]

6
4 A beaker contains some water at room temperature. A student places a mercury-in-glass

thermometer in the water with the bulb of the thermometer just beneath the surface of the water.
Fig. 4.1 shows the arrangement.
thermometer
water
Fig. 4.1
The student uses an electric fan to blow air across the open top of the beaker. She notices that the
reading on the thermometer begins to decrease.
(a) Explain, in terms of water molecules, why the temperature of the water at the surface begins
to decrease.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The student places the thermometer near the bottom of the beaker. The electric fan continues
to blow air across the top of the beaker. After some time, the student observes that the
temperature of the water at the bottom of the beaker is decreasing.
State the name of the thermal transfer method causing this and explain what is happening in
the water.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

7
(c) The thermometer used in this experiment has a small range and a large sensitivity.
(i) State what is meant by
1. range,
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
2. sensitivity.
....................................................................................................................................
................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State and explain the effect on the range of the thermometer of using a smaller bulb that
contains less mercury.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 9]

8
5 (a) A microscope that produces a very high magnification is used to observe the Brownian motion
of smoke particles in air.
Fig. 5.1(a) shows the apparatus used with the microscope. Fig. 5.1(b) represents the view
through the microscope and shows one of the smoke particles being observed.
smoke
particle
microscope
air molecules
light and
smoke particles
Fig. 5.1(a) Fig. 5.1(b)
(i) On Fig. 5.1(b), draw a possible path for the smoke particle. [2]
(ii) Describe how air molecules cause the smoke particle to follow the observed path.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows a volume of gas in a cylinder.
piston
gas air at
atmospheric
pressure
Fig. 5.2
The piston in the cylinder is free to move. The piston moves to the left when the temperature
of the gas is decreased.
Explain, in terms of the molecules of the gas, why this happens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18
9
6 Sound is a longitudinal wave.
(a) Sketch a representation of a longitudinal wave. On your sketch
• indicate and label a distance to show the wavelength,

• mark and label the centre of one compression,
• mark and label the centre of one rarefaction.
[3]
(b) A longitudinal wave passes from one medium into another medium. The speed of the wave is
slower in the second medium.
State what happens to
(i) the frequency of the wave,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the wavelength of the wave.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(c) State a typical value for the speed of sound in air.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]

10
7 (a) A ray of light travelling in air strikes a glass block at an angle of 30° to the normal. The light
slows down as it enters the glass block.
State and explain, in terms of wavefronts, what happens to the light.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The speed of light in this block of glass is 1.9 × 108 m / s.
Calculate the refractive index of the glass.
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

11
8 (a) A thin converging lens is used to produce an image I of object O.
Fig. 8.1 shows O, I and the screen on which the image is produced.
screen
principal axis
1.0 cm
1.0 cm
Fig. 8.1
(i) On Fig. 8.1, draw a straight line to represent a ray from the tip of the arrowhead of O to
the tip of the arrowhead of I. Draw a vertical dotted line to indicate the position of the
lens. This dotted line must extend above and below the principal axis. [2]
(ii) Draw a second ray from the tip of the object O to the tip of image I. This ray should pass
through a principle focus. Label the principle focus, F. [1]
(iii) Determine the focal length of the lens.
focal length = ...........................................................[1]
(iv) Image I is further from the lens than object O is from the lens. Image I is described as
enlarged and inverted.
State and explain one other characteristic of I.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]

12
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows a spherical fishbowl, full of water, by a window. A black curtain hangs behind
the fishbowl.
window black curtain
fishbowl
bright
sunlight
water
Fig. 8.2
When full of water, the fishbowl can act as a converging lens.
Suggest one possible hazard of leaving the fishbowl next to the window in bright sunlight.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18

13
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit that includes a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 12 V.
12 V
A V
20 Ω
Fig. 9.1
The reading on the ammeter is 0.15 A.
(a) Calculate the resistance of the circuit.
resistance = ...........................................................[2]
(b) The variable resistor is adjusted so that its resistance decreases.
(i) State what happens to the reading on the ammeter.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State and explain what happens to the reading on the voltmeter.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The battery is formed from cells of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 1.5 V.
(i) Explain, in terms of electrical energy, what is meant by an electromotive force (e.m.f.)
of 1.5 V.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) State how many 1.5 V cells are connected in series to form the battery.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

14
10 (a) A bar magnet is held with its N-pole just inside one end of a coil.
Fig. 10.1 shows the coil connected to a galvanometer that has the zero mark in the centre of
the scale.
L
N S
Fig. 10.1
The magnet is pulled horizontally to the right at a constant speed through a large distance.
(i) State what happens to the galvanometer reading as time passes.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) As the magnet moves, an N-pole is produced at the left-hand end L of the coil.
Explain why the pole at L is an N-pole.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) A transformer has NP turns on the primary coil and NS turns on the secondary coil. The
transformer is used in a school laboratory as a 12 V alternating current (a.c.) supply. The
transformer is powered from the 240 V a.c. mains supply.
(i) Determine the turns ratio NP / NS of the transformer.
NP / NS = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The laboratory 12 V a.c. supply is rectified to produce a direct current (d.c.) supply.
Underline the component that the rectification circuit must include.
AND gate diode NOT gate potentiometer thermistor

[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18
15
11 (a) State the type of radioactive emission that causes
(i) the proton number of a nuclide to increase by 1,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) the nucleon number of a nuclide to decrease by 4,
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) no change in the proton number and no change in the nucleon number of a nuclide.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The isotope radon-220 is radioactive and it decays by α-particle emission.
(i) Fig. 11.1 shows a beam of α-particles entering the electric field between two charged
plates.
charged plate
+ + + + + + + + + +
electric
field
beam of
α-particles
– – – – – – – – – –
charged plate
Fig. 11.1
On Fig. 11.1, sketch the path that the beam of α-particles follows in the electric field. [1]
(ii) The half-life of radon-220 is 56 s.
A sample of this isotope contains 7.2 × 106 atoms.
Predict the number of α-particles that the radon-220 in the sample emits in the next
168 s.
number of α-particles emitted = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/M/J/18
* 8 1 9 2 3 7 7 3 5 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NH/SW) 151945/4
2
1 A train of mass 5.6 × 105 kg is at rest in a station.
At time t = 0 s, a resultant force acts on the train and it starts to accelerate forwards.
Fig. 1.1 is the distance-time graph for the train for the first 120 s.
5000
distance / m
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120
time t / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Use Fig. 1.1 to determine:
1. the average speed of the train during the 120 s
average speed = ...........................................................[1]
2. the speed of the train at time t = 100 s.
speed = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

3
(ii) Describe how the acceleration of the train at time t = 100 s differs from the acceleration
at time t = 20 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) (i) The initial acceleration of the train is 0.75 m / s2.
Calculate the resultant force that acts on the train at this time.
resultant force = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) At time t = 120 s, the train begins to decelerate.
State what is meant by deceleration.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a uniform plank AB of length 2.0 m suspended from two ropes X and Y.
P Q
1.5 m
rope X rope Y
A B
0.5 m
W = 210 N
Fig. 2.1
The weight W of the plank is 210 N. The force in rope X is P. The force in rope Y is Q.
(a) State, in terms of P, the moment of force P about B.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Calculate:
(i) the moment of W about B
moment = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the force P
force P = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) the force Q.
force Q = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

5
3 (a) State what is meant by the principle of conservation of energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a girl throwing a heavy ball.
ball
Fig. 3.1
(i) State the energy changes that take place from when the girl begins to exert a force on
the ball until the ball hits the ground and stops moving.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) The mass of the ball is 4.0 kg. The girl exerts a force on the ball for 0.60 s. The speed of
the ball increases from 0 m / s to 12 m / s before it leaves the girl’s hand.
Calculate:
1. the momentum of the ball on leaving the girl’s hand
momentum = ...........................................................[2]
2. the average resultant force exerted on the ball.
average resultant force = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
6
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows liquid in a cylinder.
cylinder
liquid
Fig. 4.1
The depth of the liquid is 10 cm and the radius of the cylinder is 3.0 cm. The weight of the
liquid in the cylinder is 2.5 N.
density = ...........................................................[3]
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows a device that measures the pressure of a gas supply.
gas supply
liquid
Fig. 4.2
(i) State the name of the device. .......................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

7
(ii) The difference h between the two liquid levels is 2.0 cm. The density of the liquid is
800 kg / m3.
Calculate the difference between the pressure of the gas and atmospheric pressure.
pressure difference = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) A similar device with a tube of smaller cross-sectional area is connected to a gas supply
at the same pressure.
State and explain any effect on the value of h.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

8
5 (a) (i) In the space below, draw a labelled diagram of the structure of a thermocouple
thermometer. Include the device from which a reading is taken.
[3]
(ii) A thermocouple thermometer is used to measure the temperature of the flame of a small
candle.
State two reasons why the thermocouple thermometer is suitable for this application.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) State and explain any effect on the sensitivity of a liquid-in-glass thermometer of:
(i) reducing the diameter of the capillary tube
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) increasing the volume of the liquid-filled bulb.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

9
6 (a) State three factors that determine the rate of evaporation of water.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A person climbs out of a swimming pool and stands in the open air.
Explain why evaporation of water from the surface of the person’s body causes the person to
feel cold.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 5]

10
7 (a) A laser produces a beam of monochromatic light. State what is meant by the term
monochromatic.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) A wave, in air, is incident on a glass block. Fig. 7.1 shows the wavefronts at the air-glass
boundary. The arrow shows the direction of travel of the wavefronts.
direction of
travel of
wavefronts
air
glass
Fig. 7.1
The wave undergoes reflection and refraction at the air-glass boundary.
On Fig. 7.1 draw:
(i) the wavefronts of the reflected wave [3]
(ii) the wavefronts of the refracted wave. [3]
(c) A transverse wave is produced in a long, horizontal rope. The rope is much longer than the
wavelength of the wave.
In the space below, sketch a diagram to show the appearance of the rope as the wave passes
along it. Label two important features of the wave.
[2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18
11
8 A vibrating source on a ship produces a sound wave that travels through the ocean. The wave
produced is a longitudinal wave.
(a) Explain what is meant by the term longitudinal wave.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
(b) The frequency of the sound wave is 800 Hz.
(i) The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.
State a typical value for the speed of sound in a liquid.
...................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Using your value from (b)(i), calculate the wavelength of the sound wave in the ocean.
wavelength = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 6]

12
9 Fig. 9.1 shows the symbol for a 12 V battery.
12 V
Fig. 9.1
(a) Two lamps are connected in parallel with the battery. On Fig. 9.1, using the correct symbols,
complete the circuit diagram. [1]
(b) One of these lamps has a resistance of 6.0 Ω.
Calculate, for this lamp:
(i) the current
current = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) the power.
power = ...........................................................[2]
(c) The power of the other lamp is 36 W.
Calculate the total energy delivered to this lamp in 20 hours.
energy = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

13
10 A transformer consists of two coils of wire wound on a metal core. Fig. 10.1 represents the
transformer.
core
primary coil secondary coil
Fig. 10.1
(a) State the name of the metal from which the core is made.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The primary coil of the transformer is connected to the output voltage of an a.c. generator
which supplies an alternating current.
(i) Explain why there is a voltage between the two terminals of the secondary coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) There are 560 turns on the primary coil and 910 turns on the secondary coil of the
transformer. The voltage between the two terminals of the secondary coil is 78 V.
Calculate the voltage supplied by the a.c. generator.
generator voltage = ............................................................[2]
(c) Transformers are used to increase the voltage when electrical energy is transmitted in cables
across long distances.
Explain why power losses in the cables are lower when the voltage is high.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

14
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows data about nine elements.
proton number element symbol

2 helium He
3 lithium Li
4 beryllium Be
5 boron B
6 carbon C
7 nitrogen N
8 oxygen O
9 fluorine F
10 neon Ne
Fig. 11.1
Carbon-14 is a radioactive isotope with a nucleon number of 14. It decays by emitting

β-particles.
Use any data you need from Fig. 11.1 to write down the nuclide equation for this decay.
[4]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

15
(b) A radioactive sample is placed close to a detector. The radioactive isotope in the sample has
a long half-life. The detector records a count rate of 597 counts / s.
Fig. 11.2 shows the readings when different materials are placed between the radioactive
sample and the detector.
count rate
material
counts / s
a sheet of paper 602
a piece of thin aluminium 598
a piece of thin lead 510
Fig. 11.2
Explain whether any α-particles, β-particles or γ-rays are emitted by the radioactive sample.
α-particles .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
β-particles .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
γ-rays ........................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/41/O/N/18

* 6 7 5 4 0 7 4 2 4 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NH/SW) 151944/4
2
1 A lorry is travelling along a straight, horizontal road.
Fig. 1.1 is the distance-time graph for the lorry.
3000
distance / m
2000
1000
0
0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140
time t / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Using Fig. 1.1, determine:
(i) the speed of the lorry at time t = 30 s
speed = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the average speed of the lorry between time t = 60 s and time t = 120 s.
average speed = ...........................................................[2]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

3
(b) At time t = 30 s, the total resistive force acting on the lorry is 1.4 × 104 N.
(i) Using Fig. 1.1, determine the magnitude of the acceleration of the lorry at time t = 30 s.
acceleration = ...........................................................[1]
(ii) Determine the forward force on the lorry due to its engine at time t = 30 s.
forward force = ...........................................................[1]
(c) Describe the motion of the lorry between time t = 60 s and time t = 130 s.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 8]

4
2 (a) Fig 2.1 shows liquid in a cylinder.
cylinder
liquid
Fig. 2.1
Table 2.1 gives some data about the cylinder and the liquid.
Table 2.1
radius of cylinder 3.5 cm

weight of empty cylinder 2.5 N
depth of liquid 12.0 cm
density of liquid 900 kg / m3
The cylinder containing liquid is placed on a digital balance that displays the mass in kg.
Calculate the reading shown on the balance.
reading ...................................................... kg [4]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

5
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows a device that measures the pressure of a gas.
gas supply
glass tube
liquid 50 mm
Fig. 2.2
(i) State the name of the device. .......................................................................................[1]
(ii) The pressure of the gas is 400 Pa greater than atmospheric pressure.
density = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) With the gas supply connected, the top of the tube on the left of the device is sealed
securely with a rubber stopper. The gas pressure is then increased.
State and explain what happens to the liquid in the device.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
[Total: 9]

6
3 (a) The velocity of an object of mass m increases from u to v.
State, in terms of m, u and v, the change of momentum of the object.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) In a game of tennis, a player hits a stationary ball with his racquet.
(i) The racquet is in contact with the ball for 6.0 ms. The average force on the ball during
this time is 400 N.
Calculate the impulse on the tennis ball.
impulse = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) The mass of the ball is 0.056 kg.
Calculate the speed with which the ball leaves the racquet.
speed = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) State the energy transfer that takes place:
1. as the ball changes shape during the contact between the racquet and the ball
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. as the ball leaves the racquet.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

8
4 Fig. 4.1 shows apparatus used by a student to measure the specific heat capacity of iron.
thermometer
electric heater
iron block
Fig. 4.1
(a) The student improves the accuracy of the experiment by placing material around the block,
as shown in Fig. 4.2.
material
Fig. 4.2
(i) Suggest the name of a possible material the student could use and explain how it
improves the accuracy of the experiment.
suggestion .........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

9
(ii) State how the student could further improve the accuracy of the experiment by using
more of the material used in Fig. 4.2.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The current in the heater is 3.8 A and the potential difference (p.d.) across it is 12 V. The iron
block has a mass of 2.0 kg. When the heater is switched on for 10 minutes, the temperature
of the block rises from 25 °C to 55 °C.
Calculate the specific heat capacity of iron.
specific heat capacity = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 8]

10
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows a visible spectrum focused on a screen by passing light from a source of white
light through a lens and a prism.
glass
screen
prism
glass
lens
A
visible spectrum
B
filament lamp
(white light source)
Fig. 5.1
(i) State the name of the process that separates the colours in white light.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State the colour of the light on the screen at:
point A ........................................
point B ........................................
[1]
(iii) State the property of the glass of the prism that causes white light to be split into the
different colours of the spectrum.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

11
(b) Fig. 5.2 shows a section of an optical fibre in air. A ray of light is incident on the fibre wall at X.
X
optical fibre
ray of
light
Fig. 5.2
(i) On Fig. 5.2, continue the path of the ray of light up to the end of the fibre. [1]
(ii) The refractive index of the material of the fibre is 1.46. Calculate the critical angle of the
material of the fibre.
critical angle = ...........................................................[2]
(iii) State two uses of optical fibres.
1 ........................................................................................................................................
2 ........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]

12
6 Fig. 6.1 represents a sound wave of wavelength 0.45 m travelling from left to right.
(a) On Fig. 6.1:
(i) at the centre of a compression, mark a cross and label it C [1]
(ii) at the centre of a rarefaction, mark a cross and label it R [1]
(iii) draw a double-headed arrow to represent a distance of 0.90 m. [1]
(b) The frequency of the wave is 750 Hz.
Calculate the speed of the wave.
speed = ...........................................................[2]
(c) Suggest a medium through which the sound wave is travelling and state your reasoning.
medium ..............................................................................................................................
reason ................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[1]
(d) Another type of wave that consists of compressions and rarefactions is ultrasound.
(i) State one other similarity between sound of frequency 750 Hz and ultrasound.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State one way in which sound of frequency 750 Hz is different from ultrasound.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

13
BLANK PAGE

14
7 Fig. 7.1 shows three identical lamps and an ammeter connected to a power supply.
power
supply
Fig. 7.1
The switches are closed. Each lamp is rated at 60 W and operates at its normal working voltage of
110 V.
(a) Calculate:
(i) the current in each lamp
current = ............................................................[2]
(ii) the current in the ammeter
current = ...........................................................[1]
(iii) the voltage of the power supply.
voltage = ...........................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

15
(b) (i) Calculate the resistance of the filament of one of the lamps when working normally.
resistance = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) Another lamp X has a filament with twice the resistance of each lamp in the circuit of
Fig. 7.1. The material and the temperature of the filament in lamp X is the same as the
filaments in the lamps in Fig. 7.1.
In Table 7.1, tick any box in the right-hand column that shows a possible difference
between the filament of lamp X and a filament of one of the lamps in the circuit.
Table 7.1
X has half the length

X has twice the length
X has one quarter the area of cross-section
X has half the area of cross-section
X has two times the area of cross-section
X has four times the area of cross-section
[2]
[Total: 8]

16
8 (a) (i) Fig. 8.1 shows a positively charged cube of insulating material. The cube is fixed to a
piece of wood that is floating on water. A negatively charged rod is held above the piece
of wood and brought close to the cube, as shown.
positively charged cube

of insulating material
negatively charged rod
+ – –
+ –
+
piece of wood
floating on water
Fig. 8.1
State and explain any movement of the piece of wood.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Fig. 8.2 shows two cubes of insulating material. One is positively charged and the other
is negatively charged. The cubes are fixed to a piece of wood that is floating on water.
Charged rods are held above the piece of wood and brought close to the cubes, as
shown.
negatively charged cube negatively charged rod

of insulating material
– –
–
+ positively charged cube
– +
– + of insulating material
–
+ +
piece of wood
floating on water
positively charged rod
Fig. 8.2
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

17
State and explain any movement of the piece of wood.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) In terms of a simple electron model, describe the differences between conductors and
insulators.
conductors ................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
insulators ..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) On Fig. 8.3, draw the electric field pattern around a single point positive charge.
Fig. 8.3
[1]
[Total: 7]

18
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a permanent bar magnet next to a circuit that contains a coil and a galvanometer.
N S
Fig. 9.1
(a) Suggest a metal from which the magnet is made.
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The magnet is moved to the left and inserted a small distance into the coil. The galvanometer
deflects briefly and shows that there is a current in the coil.
(i) Explain why there is a current in the coil.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) As the magnet is moving near to the coil, end Q of the coil behaves as a magnetic pole.
State the polarity of end Q and explain why it has this polarity.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) Suggest two ways in which the deflection of the galvanometer can be reversed.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

19
10 (a) A detector of ionising radiation measures the background count rate in a classroom where
there are no radioactive samples present.
The readings, in counts/minute, taken over a period of time are shown in Table 10.1.
Table 10.1
counts / minute 16 12 14 16 15 17
(i) State two possible sources of this background radiation.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(ii) Explain why the readings are not the same.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) With no radioactive sample present, a scientist records a background radiation count of
40 counts / minute.
He brings a radioactive sample close to the detector. The count rate increases to
200 counts / minute.
After 24 days the count rate is 50 counts / minute.
Calculate the half-life of the radioactive sample.
half-life = ...........................................................[4]

20
(c) Draw a line between each type of ionising radiation and its property and another line between
the property and its use. One has been done for you.
Name of Property Use

ionising
radiation
It is the most
ionising radiation
Remotely detecting
and is most easily
X-ray leaks in underground
absorbed by very
water pipes
small amounts of
substance
Penetration is
affected by small
Detecting fractures in
α-particle changes in the
bones
amount of solid it is
passing through
It is highly
Detecting smoke in a
β-particle penetrating and is
fire alarm system
poorly ionising
Can pass easily

Detecting a change in
through soft living
the thickness of
γ-ray tissue. Calcium
aluminium foil during
absorbs more than
its manufacture
soft tissue
[3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2018 0625/42/O/N/18

* 6 0 7 6 5 3 3 6 2 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NH/SW) 151946/4
2
1 Fig. 1.1 is the distance-time graph for a moving car.
500
distance / m
400
300
200
100
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60
time t / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) On Fig. 1.1, mark a point P where the acceleration of the car is zero. [1]
(b) Determine:
(i) the speed of the car at time t = 15 s
speed = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the average speed of the car between time t = 30 s and time t = 45 s.
average speed = ...........................................................[2]
(c) At time t = 45 s, the car starts to decelerate. At time t = 55 s and at a distance of 400 m from
the starting point, the car stops. It then remains stationary for 5.0 s.
On Fig. 1.1, draw a possible continuation of the distance-time graph. [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18

3
2 (a) Complete Fig. 2.1 by writing in the right-hand column the name of the quantity given by the
product in the left-hand column.
product quantity
mass × acceleration
force × time
[2]
Fig. 2.1
(b) Fig. 2.2 shows a man hitting a ball with a golf club.
golf club ball
Fig. 2.2
The ball has a mass of 0.046 kg. The golf club is in contact with the ball for 5.0 × 10–4 s and
the ball leaves the golf club at a speed of 65 m / s.
(i) Calculate:
1. the momentum of the ball as it leaves the golf club
momentum = ...........................................................[2]
2. the average resultant force acting on the ball while it is in contact with the golf club.
average force = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) While the golf club is in contact with the ball, the ball becomes compressed and changes
shape.
State the type of energy stored in the ball during its contact with the golf club.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
[Total: 7]

4
3 The density of mercury is 1.4 × 104 kg / m3.
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows an instrument that is being used to determine the atmospheric pressure.
space A
760 mm
mercury
(i) State the name of the instrument.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) State what is in space A.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(iii) Calculate the atmospheric pressure.
atmospheric pressure = ...........................................................[2]
(b) Fig. 3.2 shows mercury stored in a cylindrical glass jar of internal radius 4.0 cm. The depth of
mercury in the jar is 12 cm.
mercury
12 cm
8.0 cm
Calculate the weight of mercury in the jar.
weight = ...........................................................[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18
5
4 A wave is travelling across the surface of water in a tank at a speed of 0.15 m / s.
(a) The wavelength of the wave is 0.030 m.
frequency = ...........................................................[2]
(b) This water wave is a transverse wave.
(i) Explain what is meant by the term transverse wave motion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
(ii) Draw a diagram that represents a transverse wave travelling from left to right across the
page. On your diagram, label:
• the wavelength
• the amplitude.
[3]
[Total: 8]

6
5 (a) A student is supplied with a small block of iron, a thermometer and an electrical heater of
power P.
There are two holes drilled in the iron block. The heater fits tightly into one hole and the
student places the thermometer into the other hole.
Fig. 5.1 shows the equipment.
cable
thermometer
heater
iron block
Fig. 5.1
The student uses this equipment when determining the specific heat capacity of iron.
State:
• the other equipment the student will need

• the measurements the student needs to take
• the equation used when calculating the value of the specific heat capacity of iron.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[4]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18

7
(b) In the student’s home there is a wood-burning stove, which is also made of iron. The mass of
the wood-burning stove is 85 kg.
(i) State what is meant by the thermal capacity of an object.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) The specific heat capacity of iron is 460 J / (kg °C).

Calculate the thermal capacity of the wood-burning stove.
thermal capacity = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows white light incident at point X on a glass prism.
screen
prism
ray of white light
Fig. 6.1
(i) From point X on Fig. 6.1, draw a ray of red light, labelled R and a ray of violet light,
labelled V, to show how a spectrum is formed on the screen. [2]
(ii) State the colour of light in the visible spectrum with the shortest wavelength.
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) The critical angle for a type of glass is 42°.
Fig. 6.2 and Fig. 6.3 show two prisms ABC and PQR made of this type of glass. A ray of
monochromatic red light passes into each of the prisms.
A P
45° normal 60° Y normal
45° 60°
B C Q R
Fig. 6.2 Fig. 6.3
(i) State what is meant by monochromatic light.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18

9
(ii) Describe and explain what happens to the ray of light in Fig. 6.2 as it strikes side AC of
the prism.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) Describe and explain what happens to the ray of light in Fig. 6.3 as it strikes the glass at
point Y.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 9]

10
7 A defibrillator is a machine that sends an electrical charge through the heart of a patient whose
heart is not beating correctly. Doctors learn to use a defibrillator by practising on a medical dummy.
Fig. 7.1 shows the two contacts of a defibrillator attached to a medical dummy.
contacts
defibrillator
medical
dummy
Fig. 7.1
The contacts that touch the dummy are made from metal, and when the defibrillator is being used,
one contact becomes strongly negatively charged and the other contact becomes strongly positively
charged. The handles of the contacts are made from plastic, which is an electrical insulator.
(a) (i) State how the structure of an electrical insulator differs from the structure of a conductor.
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[1]
(ii) Suggest why the handles are made from an electrical insulator.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) Explain, in terms of the particles involved, how one contact becomes negatively charged and
how the other contact becomes positively charged.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(c) The defibrillator passes a charge of 9.1 × 10–3 C through the medical dummy in 6.5 × 10–4 s.
Calculate the average current in the dummy.
current = ...........................................................[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18
11
8 A 9.0 V battery is connected to a 120 Ω resistor in series with wire P.

Fig. 8.1 shows a voltmeter connected across the 120 Ω resistor.
9.0 V
120 Ω
P
Fig. 8.1
(a) State the energy changes that are taking place in the circuit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[2]
(b) The reading on the voltmeter is 2.4 V.
Calculate:
(i) the current in the 120 Ω resistor
current = ...........................................................[2]
(ii) the potential difference (p.d.) across wire P
p.d. = ...........................................................[1]
(iii) the resistance of wire P.
resistance = ...........................................................[1]
(c) Wire P has a diameter d and a length l. A second piece of wire Q is made of the same
material as P.
The diameter of wire Q is 0.50 × d and its length is 5.0 × l.
Calculate the resistance of wire Q.
resistance = ...........................................................[4]
[Total: 10]
12
9 (a) Describe how a direct current (d.c.) differs from an alternating current (a.c.).
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[1]
(b) Fig. 9.1 shows how the voltage output of an a.c. generator varies with time.
8.0
voltage / V
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
time / s
–2.0
–4.0
–6.0
–8.0
Fig. 9.1
A heater is connected directly to the a.c. generator and the maximum current in the heater is
0.75 A.
(i) On Fig. 9.2, sketch a graph to indicate how the current in the heater varies with time.
1.00
current / A
0.75
0.50
0.25
0
0 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0 1.2
time / s
–0.25
–0.50
–0.75
–1.00
[1]
Fig. 9.2
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18

13
(ii) Calculate the power produced by the heater when the current is 0.75 A.
power = ...........................................................[2]
(c) Fig. 9.3 shows the coil ABCD of the a.c. generator between two magnetic poles.
rotation
direction
B C
N A D S
Fig. 9.3
(i) On Fig. 9.3, draw a straight arrow to indicate the direction in which side AB of the coil is
moving. Label this arrow M. [1]
(ii) Deduce the direction of the current induced in side AB of the coil and explain your
reasoning.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................[2]
(iii) The rate at which the coil of the a.c. generator rotates increases.
State two ways in which the alternating voltage changes.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
14
10 Thorium-234 (23940Th) is radioactive. It decays by β-emission to form an isotope of protactinium

(Pa).
(a) Complete the nuclide equation for this decay.
..... .....
234Th Pa + β
90 ..... .....
[2]
(b) A pure sample of thorium-234 emits β-particles at a count rate of 2480 counts / second.
The half-life of thorium-234 is 24 days.
Calculate the count rate for the emission of β-particles from the thorium in the sample after
72 days have passed.
count rate ...........................................................[3]
(c) The isotope of protactinium in (a) is also radioactive. It decays by β-emission and has a
half-life of 70 seconds.
State and explain how this would affect the observed count rate for the sample in (b) after
72 days.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...............................................................................................................................................[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2018 0625/43/O/N/18

Cambridge Assessment International Education
* 6 0 9 2 5 3 1 2 4 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes
Write your centre number, candidate number and name on all the work you hand in.

This syllabus is regulated for use in England, Wales and Northern Ireland as a Cambridge International Level 1/Level 2 Certificate.
DC (ST/CT) 167383/5
2
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows the distance-time graph for the journey of a cyclist.
350
300
distance / m
250
200
150
100
50
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(i) Describe the motion of the cyclist in the time between:
1. time = 0 and time = 15 s
...........................................................................................................................................
2. time = 15 s and time = 30 s
...........................................................................................................................................
3. time = 30 s and time = 40 s.
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
(ii) Calculate, for the 40 s journey:
1. the average speed
average speed = ......................................................... [2]
2. the maximum speed.
maximum speed = ......................................................... [2]

[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19
3
2 (a) State one advantage and one disadvantage of using a wind turbine as a source of electrical
energy.
advantage .................................................................................................................................
disadvantage ............................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a wind turbine.
wind speed
16 m / s
area swept out by

the turbine blades
Fig. 2.1
(i) The wind blows at a speed of 16 m / s towards the turbine blades. In one second, a
volume of 24 000 m3 of air passes through the circular area swept out by the blades. The
density of air is 1.3 kg / m3.
Calculate:
1. the mass of air that passes through the circular area swept out by the blades in 1.0 s
mass = ......................................................... [2]
2. the kinetic energy of the mass of air that passes through the area swept out by the
blades.
kinetic energy = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest why some of the kinetic energy of the air that passes through the circular area
swept out by the blades is not converted into electrical energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
4
3 (a) An object is moving in a straight line at constant speed.
State three ways in which a force may change the motion of the object.
1 ...............................................................................................................................................
2 ...............................................................................................................................................
3 ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows an object suspended from two ropes. The weight of the object is 360 N. The
magnitude of the tension in each rope is T.
T T
45° 45°
object
360 N
Fig. 3.1
In the space below, determine the tension T by drawing a vector diagram of the forces acting
on the object.
State the scale you have used.
scale ...............................................................
T = ...............................................................
[5]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19
5
4 (a) Fig. 4.1 shows a mercury barometer. The tube containing the mercury is vertical.
mercury
Fig. 4.1
(i) The height h indicates a value of the atmospheric pressure.
State what is contained in the space labelled S.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) On a particular day the atmospheric pressure is 1.02 × 105 Pa. The density of mercury
is 13 600 kg / m3.
Calculate the value of h indicated by the barometer.
h = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) The tube containing mercury is now tilted so that it makes an angle of 10° with the
vertical. After tilting, there continues to be a space above the mercury in the tube.
State and explain whether the vertical height of mercury in the tube is smaller, the same,
or greater than the value calculated in (a)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Another mercury barometer in the same room at the same time shows a lower value of h than
the barometer in (a).
Suggest and explain a reason for the lower value.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
6
5 (a) State the values of the fixed points of a temperature scale.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) (i) The graduations on a liquid-in-glass thermometer are equally spaced.
For the equal spacing of the graduations to be correct, state:
1. an assumption that is made about the liquid in the thermometer
...........................................................................................................................................
2. an assumption that is made about the structure of the thermometer.
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Liquid-in-glass thermometer A has a greater range than liquid-in-glass thermometer B.
State one way the design of thermometer A is different from thermometer B.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Liquid-in-glass thermometer C has a greater sensitivity than liquid-in-glass thermometer D.
State one way the design of thermometer C is different from thermometer D.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19

7
(c) (i) In the space provided, draw a labelled diagram of a thermocouple thermometer.
[3]
(ii) Suggest when a thermocouple thermometer is more suitable than a liquid-in-glass

thermometer.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]

8
6 An electrical heater is placed on the floor of a room in a house. The heater is switched on.
(a) State the main process by which thermal energy is transferred to the air in all parts of the
room.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The heater has a power of 1.5 kW. The air in the room has a mass of 65 kg. The specific heat
capacity of air is 720 J / (kg °C).
(i) Calculate the time it takes for this heater to raise the temperature of the air in the room
from 8.0 °C to 15.0 °C.
time = ......................................................... [4]
(ii) State two reasons why the time calculated in (b)(i) is smaller than the actual time taken
to raise the temperature of the air in the room from 8.0 °C to 15.0 °C.
1 .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2 .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19

9
7 (a) In Fig. 7.1, the small circles represent molecules. The arrows refer to the change of state
from the arrangement of molecules on the left to the arrangement of molecules on the right.
Fig. 7.1
Complete the following by writing solid, liquid or gas in each of the blank spaces.
1. Change of state X is from ............................................ to ............................................ .
2. Change of state Y is from ............................................ to ............................................ .

[2]
(b) Explain, in terms of the forces between their molecules, why gases expand more than solids
when they undergo the same rise in temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) A cylinder of volume 0.012 m3 contains a compressed gas at a pressure of 1.8 × 106 Pa.
A valve is opened and all the compressed gas escapes from the cylinder into the atmosphere.
The temperature of the gas does not change.
Calculate the volume that the escaped gas occupies at the atmospheric pressure
of 1.0 × 105 Pa.
volume = ......................................................... [3]

[Total: 7]
10
8 Fig. 8.1 shows parallel wavefronts of a light wave in ice. The wavefronts are incident on a boundary
with air.
direction
of wave
ice
air
Fig. 8.1
The speed of the light wave in air is 3.0 × 108 m / s. The refractive index of the ice is 1.3.
(a) On Fig. 8.1:
(i) draw the wavefronts of the wave that passes into the air [3]
(ii) draw arrows to show the direction of travel of the refracted wave [1]
(iii) label the angle of incidence i and the angle of refraction r. [1]
(b) Calculate the speed of the light wave in the ice.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19

12
9 Fig. 9.1 shows current-potential difference (p.d.) graphs for a resistor and for a thermistor.
6.0
current / A
4.0
resistor
2.0 thermistor
0
0 2.0 4.0 6.0 8.0
p.d. / V
Fig. 9.1
(a) Calculate the resistance of the thermistor when the p.d. across it is 7.0 V.
resistance = ......................................................... [2]
(b) In Table 9.1, tick the boxes that indicate the effect on the resistances of the resistor and of the
thermistor when the p.d. across them is increased from 0 to 7.0 V.
Table 9.1
component resistance increases resistance is constant resistance decreases

resistor
thermistor
[2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19

13
(c) The thermistor and the resistor are connected in parallel to a 7.0 V supply.
Calculate:
(i) the current from the supply
current = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) the energy transferred from the supply in 5.0 minutes.
energy = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

14
10 (a) The electrical energy produced by a power station is transmitted over long distances at a very
high voltage.
Explain why a very high voltage is used.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Fig. 10.1 represents a transformer.
core
4000
120 V P turns S 9.0 V
Fig. 10.1
(i) The primary coil P has 4000 turns and an input of 120 V. The secondary coil S has an
output of 9.0 V.
Calculate the number of turns in the secondary coil.
number = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) State a suitable material for the core of the transformer.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19

15
11 (a) (i) One isotope of iridium-194 is represented by

194
Ir
77
This isotope decays by β-emission to a stable isotope of platinum (Pt).
Complete the nuclide equation for this decay.
194 ...... ......

Ir Pt + β
77 ...... ...... [3]
(ii) The half-life of iridium-194 is 19 hours. A sample of iridium-194 has an initial count-rate
of 1100 counts / min.
Calculate the count-rate from this sample after 38 hours.
count-rate = ......................................................... [2]
(b) State two ways in which γ-emission differs from β-emission.
1 ...............................................................................................................................................
2 ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/F/M/19

* 4 7 0 2 7 0 2 2 7 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (KS/TP) 169309/4
2
1 A rocket is stationary on the launchpad. At time t = 0, the rocket engines are switched on and
exhaust gases are ejected from the nozzles of the engines. The rocket accelerates upwards.
Fig. 1.1 shows how the acceleration of the rocket varies between time t = 0 and time t = tf.
acceleration
0
0 tf
time t
Fig. 1.1
(a) Define acceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) On Fig. 1.2, sketch a graph to show how the speed of the rocket varies between time t = 0
and time t = tf.
speed
0
0 tf
time t
Fig. 1.2
[3]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

3
(c) Some time later, the rocket is far from the Earth. The effect of the Earth’s gravity on the
motion of the rocket is insignificant. As the rocket accelerates, its momentum increases.
(i) State the principle of the conservation of momentum.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain how the principle of the conservation of momentum applies to the accelerating
rocket and the exhaust gases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a sign that extends over a road.
support post
ACCIDENT
SLOW DOWN
sign
1.8 m
concrete
block W
1.3 m
P
70 cm
Fig. 2.1
The mass of the sign is 3.4 × 103 kg.
(a) Calculate the weight W of the sign.
W = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The weight of the sign acts at a horizontal distance of 1.8 m from the centre of the support
post and it produces a turning effect about point P.
Point P is a horizontal distance of 1.3 m from the centre of the support post.
(i) Calculate the moment about P due to the weight of the sign.
moment = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

5
(ii) A concrete block is positioned on the other side of the support post with its centre of
mass a horizontal distance of 70 cm from the centre of the support post.
1. State what is meant by centre of mass.
....................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
2. The weight of the concrete block produces a moment about point P that exactly
cancels the moment caused by the weight W.
Calculate the weight of the concrete block.
weight = ......................................................... [2]
(c) The concrete block is removed. The sign and support post rotate about point P in a clockwise
direction.
State and explain what happens to the moment about point P due to the weight of the sign as
it rotates.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]

6
3 A cube of side 0.040 m is floating in a container of liquid. Fig. 3.1 shows that the surface of the
liquid is 0.028 m above the level of the bottom face of the cube.
air
cube 0.040 m
liquid
0.028 m
valve
pump
Fig. 3.1
The pressure of the air above the cube exerts a force on the top face of the cube. The valve is
closed.
(a) Explain, in terms of air molecules, how the force due to the pressure of the air is produced.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The density of the liquid in the container is 1500 kg / m3.
Calculate:
(i) the pressure due to the liquid at a depth of 0.028 m
pressure = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) the force on the bottom face of the cube caused by the pressure due to the liquid.
force = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

7
(c) The valve is opened and liquid is pumped into the container. The surface of the liquid rises a
distance of 0.034 m.
The cube remains floating in the liquid with its bottom face 0.028 m below the surface of the
liquid.
(i) Calculate the work done on the cube by the force in (b)(ii).
work done = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest one reason why this is not an efficient method of lifting up the cube.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]

8
4 Gas of mass 0.23 g is trapped in a cylinder by a piston. The gas is at atmospheric pressure which
is 1.0 × 105 Pa. Fig. 4.1 shows the piston held in position by a catch.
gas cylinder
air at atmospheric
pressure
piston
heater catch
Fig. 4.1
The volume of the trapped gas is 1.9 × 10–4 m3.
An electrical heater is used to increase the temperature of the trapped gas by 550 °C.
(a) The specific heat capacity of the gas is 0.72 J / (g °C).
(i) Calculate the energy required to increase the temperature of the trapped gas by 550 °C.
energy = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) The power of the heater is 2.4 W.
1. Calculate how long it takes for the heater to supply the energy calculated in (a)(i).
time = ......................................................... [2]
2. In practice, it takes much longer to increase the temperature of the gas by 550 °C
using the heater.
Suggest one reason for this.
....................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................
.............................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

9
(b) When the temperature of the gas has increased by 550 °C, its pressure is 2.9 × 105 Pa. The
catch is then released allowing the piston to move. As the piston moves, the temperature of
the gas remains constant.
(i) State and explain what happens to the piston.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Determine the volume of the gas when the piston stops moving.
volume = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

10
5 Liquids and gases are two states of matter.
(a) In both boiling and evaporation, a liquid changes into a gas.
(i) State two ways in which boiling differs from evaporation.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Before injecting a patient, a doctor wipes a small amount of a volatile liquid on to the
patient’s skin.
Explain, in terms of molecules, how this procedure cools the patient’s skin.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [4]
(b) Gases can be compressed but liquids are incompressible.
Explain, in terms of molecules, why liquids are incompressible.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

12
6 Green light of frequency 5.7 × 1014 Hz is travelling in air at a speed of 3.0 × 108 m / s. The light is
incident on the surface of a transparent solid.
Fig. 6.1 shows the wavefronts and the direction of travel of the light in the air.
wavefront
air
solid
Fig. 6.1
The light travels more slowly in the transparent solid.
(a) Explain, in terms of the wavefronts, why the light changes direction as it enters the solid. You
may draw on Fig. 6.1 as part of your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The refractive index of the transparent solid is 1.3.
(i) The light is incident on the surface of the solid at an angle of incidence of 67°.
Calculate the angle of refraction of the light in the solid.
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

13
(ii) Determine the wavelength of the green light in the transparent solid.
wavelength = ......................................................... [4]
[Total: 9]

14
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a circuit diagram that includes component X.
A
X
20 Ω
30 Ω
Fig. 7.1
(a) State the name of component X.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The electromotive force (e.m.f.) of the battery is E. The switch is closed.
The potential difference (p.d.) across the 30 Ω resistor is V30.

The p.d. across the 20 Ω resistor is V20.
The p.d. across component X is VX.
State an equation that relates VX to:
(i) V30
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) E and V20.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

15
(c) The e.m.f. of the battery is 6.0 V and the resistance of component X is 15 Ω.
Calculate:
(i) the total resistance of the circuit
resistance = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) the ammeter reading.
reading = ......................................................... [2]
(d) The temperature of component X increases.
State and explain what happens to the ammeter reading.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]

16
8 A student turns the handle of an alternating current (a.c.) generator and the coil rotates.
Fig. 8.1 represents the structure of the a.c. generator.
handle
coil
N S
slip rings
coil
voltage
output
brush
Fig. 8.1
(a) There is an alternating voltage output between the two terminals.
(i) Explain why rotating the coil produces an output voltage.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State the position of the rotating coil when the alternating output voltage is at a maximum
value and explain why the maximum output occurs at this position.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

17
(b) A lamp and an open switch are connected in series to the output terminals of the a.c.
generator.
The switch is closed and the lamp lights up. The student has to apply a greater force on the
handle.
Explain why a greater force is needed to keep the lamp lit.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]

18
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows a beam of α-particles moving towards a thin sheet of gold in a vacuum.
gold sheet
beam of α-particles
detectors
vacuum
Fig. 9.1
Detectors in the region surrounding the thin gold sheet detect the α-particles and determine
the number of particles that travel in various directions.
State and explain what can be deduced from the following observations.
(i) The majority of the α-particles pass through the gold sheet undeflected and are detected
on the far side.
deduction ...........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) A small number of α-particles are deflected as they pass through the gold sheet.
deduction ...........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) A very small number of α-particles are deflected through very large angles or return back
the way they came.
deduction ...........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

19
(b) A beam that consists of both α-particles and β-particles is passed through a region of space
where there is a magnetic field perpendicular to the direction of the beam.
State two ways in which the deflection of the α-particles differs from that of the β-particles.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/M/J/19

* 3 3 7 6 1 2 0 8 2 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (CE/FC) 169310/4
2
1 A bus is travelling between points A and D. There are bus stops at A, B, C and D but the bus does
not stop at B and C. Fig. 1.1 is a speed-time graph for the bus.
B C
40
speed
km / h 30
20
10
A D
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0
time / min
Fig. 1.1
(a) Describe the motion of the bus between each of the bus stops. Select the appropriate
description from the list below.
constant acceleration decreasing acceleration
increasing acceleration moving backwards at constant speed
moving forwards at constant speed stationary
1. between A and B ..............................................................................
2. between B and C ..............................................................................
3. between C and D .............................................................................

[3]
(b) The average speed of the bus between A and D is 23 km / h.
Calculate the distance between A and D.
distance = ........................................................ [3]
(c) The bus stops at D for 1 min and then travels at a constant acceleration for 30 seconds.
On Fig. 1.1, sketch a possible graph for this additional motion. Label X when the bus starts to
accelerate and label Y for 30 seconds later. [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a model fire engine. Its brakes are applied.
model fire engine

containing water tank
jet of water
FIRE
Fig. 2.1
0.80 kg of water is emitted in the jet every 6.0 s at a velocity of 0.72 m / s relative to the model.
(a) Calculate the change in momentum of the water that is ejected in 6.0 s.
momentum = ........................................................ [2]
(b) Calculate the magnitude of the force acting on the model because of the jet of water.
force = ........................................................ [2]
(c) The brakes of the model are released.
State and explain the direction of the acceleration of the model.
Statement .................................................................................................................................
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(d) In (c) the model contains a water tank, which is initially full.
State and explain any change in the magnitude of the initial acceleration if the brakes are first
released when the tank is nearly empty.
Statement .................................................................................................................................
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 9]
4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows solar cells used to generate electrical energy.
Fig. 3.1
(a) State the main form of energy transferred from the Sun to the solar cells for the generation of
electrical energy.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Consider the generation of electrical energy by a large number of solar cells, as shown in
Fig. 3.1.
(i) State one environmental advantage and one environmental disadvantage.
advantage .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
disadvantage .....................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) State and explain whether this source of electrical energy is renewable.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

5
(c) Each group of solar cells is arranged in a rectangle 1.2 m × 2.8 m. The solar cells are situated
in a region where 260 W of solar energy is received per square metre of the cells. The
electrical output of each group of solar cells is a current of 2.5 A with a potential difference of
86 V.
Calculate the efficiency of the solar cells.
efficiency = .................................................... % [4]
[Total: 8]

6
4 (a) State and explain, in terms of molecules, any change in the pressure of a gas when the
volume is reduced at a constant temperature.
Statement .................................................................................................................................
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Complete Table 4.1 to give the relative order of magnitude of the expansion of gases, liquids
and solids for the same increase of temperature.
Write one of these words in each blank space:
gas liquid solid
Table 4.1
expands most
expands least
[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

7
5 (a) (i) A liquid is heated so that bubbles of its vapour rise to the surface and molecules escape
to the atmosphere.
State the name of this process .................................................................................... [1]
(ii) At a lower temperature than in (a)(i), molecules escape from the surface to the
atmosphere.
State the name of this process .................................................................................... [1]
(b) (i) Fig. 5.1 shows apparatus used to determine the power output of a heater.
thermometer
electric heater
metal block
Fig. 5.1
The metal block has a mass of 2.7 kg. The metal of the block has a specific heat capacity
of 900 J / (kg °C).
In 2 min 30 s, the temperature of the block increases from 21 °C to 39 °C.
Calculate the power of the heater.
power = ........................................................ [4]
(ii) State and explain a precaution that can be taken to improve the accuracy of the
experiment.
Statement ..........................................................................................................................
Explanation .......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows a water wave in a ripple tank.
new wave
direction
original
wave
direction
region B
region A
Fig. 6.1
(i) State the name of the process that occurs as the wave moves from region A to region B.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest a cause for the change in direction of the wave.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

9
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows a transverse wave.
displacement
0
time
Fig. 6.2
On Fig. 6.2, draw a wave which has half the amplitude and a greater frequency than the wave
shown. [2]
(c) A train travels along steel rails. A person waiting at a station hears the sound of the train
through the rails before he hears the sound through the air.
(i) Explain why this happens.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The speed of sound in the rails is 5800 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of sound of frequency 1100 Hz travelling at this speed.
wavelength = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 7]

10
7 (a) In Fig. 7.1, a converging lens projects a sharp image of an object O on to a screen.
Complete the paths of the two rays from the object to the screen.
converging lens
screen
Fig. 7.1 [2]
(b) The converging lens in (a) is replaced with a thinner converging lens. The object O and the
screen remain in the same positions as in (a). The thinner converging lens has a longer focal
length than the converging lens in (a).
Complete the paths of the two rays from the object to the screen in Fig. 7.2.
thinner converging lens

screen
Fig. 7.2 [2]
(c) A converging lens is used as a magnifying glass.

The focal length of the lens is 10 cm.
(i) Describe the position of the object in relation to the lens.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Describe the position of the image in relation to the lens and the object.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Give three properties of the image formed by a magnifying glass.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19
11
8 (a) A conducting sphere is mounted on an insulating stand. Explain how you would use a
positively charged rod of insulating material to charge the sphere by induction.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Fig. 8.1 shows an electronic component.
Fig. 8.1
State the name of the component shown in Fig. 8.1 .......................................................... [1]
(c) In the space below, write down the truth table for a NAND gate.
[2]

12
(d) Fig. 8.2 shows the connections to two logic gates.
A D
B
E
C
Fig. 8.2
Table 8.1 shows part of the truth table for the arrangement of logic gates in Fig. 8.2.
Complete Table 8.1 for the input values shown.
Table 8.1
intermediate
inputs output
point
A B C D E
0 0 1
0 1 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
[3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

13
9 (a) Describe how to demagnetise a bar magnet using alternating current (a.c.) in a coil.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Fig. 9.1 shows a simple direct current (d.c.) motor.
d.c. power supply
split-ring
commutator
N S
coil
Fig. 9.1
(i) Explain the purpose of the split-ring commutator.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) The voltage of the power supply is increased.
State the effect this has on the motor.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]

14
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a circuit containing a filament lamp of resistance 0.30 Ω and two resistors, each of
resistance 0.20 Ω.
0.20 Ω
0.20 Ω
0.30 Ω
Fig. 10.1
(a) Calculate the combined resistance of the lamp and the two resistors.
resistance = ........................................................ [3]
(b) The potential difference (p.d.) of the supply is increased so that the current in the lamp
increases.
State and explain any change in the resistance of the lamp.
Statement .................................................................................................................................
Explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

15
11 (a) A radon-222 nucleus contains 86 protons and 136 neutrons. It decays by emitting an
α-particle and becomes a nucleus of an isotope of polonium. The symbol for radon is Rn and
the symbol for polonium is Po.
Write down the nuclide equation for this decay.
[3]
(b) Carbon-14 is radioactive with a half-life of 5700 years. An animal bone is dug up in an
archaeological excavation. The quantity of carbon-14 in the bone is 25% of what it was when
the bone was buried.
Calculate the time that has elapsed since it was buried.
time = .............................................. years [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/M/J/19

* 8 2 4 7 4 4 5 0 5 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (RW/SW) 169311/4
3
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a distance‑time graph for a cyclist travelling between points P and V on a straight
road.
800
distance / m
600
V
S T U
400
R
200
Q
P
0
0 100 200 300 400 500
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Describe the motion between:
Q and R ....................................................................................................................................
R and S .....................................................................................................................................
S and T. .....................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) Calculate the speed between U and V.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
(c) After point V, the straight road continues down a steep hill. The cyclist travels down the steep
hill. He does not apply the brakes and all resistive forces can be ignored.
On Fig. 1.1, sketch a possible motion for the cyclist after V. [1]
[Total: 6]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 is the top view of a small ship of mass 1.2 × 106 kg. The ship is moving slowly sideways at
0.040 m / s as it comes in to dock.
large wooden pillars
dock wall
small ship
0.040 m / s
Fig. 2.1
The ship hits the wooden pillars which move towards the dock wall.
(a) Calculate the kinetic energy of the ship before it hits the pillars.
kinetic energy = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The ship is in contact with the pillars for 0.30 s as it comes to rest.
Calculate the average force exerted on the side of the ship.
force = ......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

5
(c) Assume that the kinetic energy calculated in (a) is used to do work moving the pillars.
Calculate the distance moved by the pillars.
distance = ......................................................... [2]
(d) Dock walls sometimes have the pillars replaced with rubber car tyres.
Explain how this reduces the possibility of damage when a boat docks.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 9]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a small submarine submerged below the surface of the sea.
surface of the sea
sea
3.0 × 103 m water
submarine
Fig. 3.1
(a) The density of sea water is 1030 kg / m3.
Calculate the pressure due to the sea water on the top of the submarine when it is 3.0 × 103 m
below the surface.
pressure = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

7
(b) The submarine emits a pulse of sound to detect other objects in the sea. The speed of sound
in sea water is 1500 m / s. An echo is received with a time delay of 0.50 s after the original
sound is emitted.
(i) Calculate the distance between the submarine and the other object.
distance = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) Another pulse of sound is emitted through the air when the submarine is on the surface.
An echo is received from a second object that is in the air. This echo is received 0.50 s
after the pulse of sound is emitted.
Compare the distance of the second object from the submarine with the distance
calculated in (b)(i). Tick one box. Give a reason for your answer.
distance is smaller
distance is the same
distance is larger
Reason ........................................................................................................................ [1]
[Total: 6]

8
4 (a) Water molecules escape to the atmosphere from water boiling in a pan. Water molecules
evaporate from the surface of a bowl of cool water and also escape to the atmosphere.
State two ways in which boiling is different from evaporation.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows a heater in a metal block.
thermometer
electric heater
metal block
Fig. 4.1
The power of the heater is 370 W and it is switched on for 4.0 minutes. The metal block has a
specific heat capacity of 420 J / (kg °C) and a mass of 5.0 kg.
Calculate the increase of temperature of the block. Assume all the thermal energy from the
heater is transferred to the block.
temperature increase = ......................................................... [4]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

9
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a cross‑section of the inside of a vacuum flask containing a cold liquid. The walls of
the vacuum flask are made of glass.
stopper
silvered
surfaces
vacuum
glass
Fig. 5.1
(a) The vacuum flask is being used to keep a liquid cool on a hot day.
Explain how the labelled features of the vacuum flask keep the liquid cool by reducing thermal
energy transfer. Include the names of the processes involved.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [5]
(b) Suggest a suitable material for the stopper.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]

10
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows wavefronts of a wave approaching a narrow gap and passing through the gap.
The wavelength is λ.
wavefronts gap barrier
direction of
travel
barrier
Fig. 6.1
(i) State the name of the process that occurs as the wave passes through the gap.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
λ
(ii) A wave with a wavelength approaches the same gap.
2
On Fig. 6.2, draw three wavefronts for this wave as it approaches the gap and three
more wavefronts as the wave continues beyond it. [3]
Fig. 6.2
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

11
(b) Table 6.1 shows 5 different types of electromagnetic wave.
In the blank column in Table 6.1, write the numbers 1 to 5 to show the order of wavelength.
Write 1 for the wave with the shortest wavelength and 5 for the wave with the longest
wavelength. [2]
Table 6.1
type of electromagnetic wave order of wavelength

gamma rays
light
microwaves
ultraviolet
X‑rays
(c) (i) State the speed of radio waves in air.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) A radio station transmits radio waves with a frequency of 96 MHz.

Calculate the wavelength of these radio waves.
wavelength = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]

12
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

13
7 Fig. 7.1 shows light approaching a boundary between two materials at speed v. The speed of the
light after crossing the boundary is 1.3v.
light
50°
boundary
Fig. 7.1
(a) Determine the angle of incidence.
angle of incidence = ......................................................... [1]
(b) Calculate the angle of refraction.
[Total: 4]

14
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a 240 V mains supply connected to an air‑conditioning unit and a freezer. A fuse X
is placed in the circuit as shown.
240 V
air-conditioning
mains freezer
unit
supply
Fig. 8.1
The freezer has an operating power of 700 W.
(a) Calculate the current in the freezer.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The maximum operating current of the air‑conditioning unit is 7.5 A.
Fuses of current rating 1 A, 3 A, 5 A, 10 A, 13 A and 30 A are available.
Suggest a suitable rating for fuse X. Give two reasons for your answer.
fuse rating .................................................................................................................................
Reason 1 ..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
Reason 2 ..................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

15
(c) A fuse is made out of a short length of wire.
Explain why fuses of a higher rating are made of thicker wire.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) Electrical energy can be obtained from renewable and non‑renewable sources of energy.
(i) State two renewable sources of energy.
Source 1 ........................................................
Source 2 ........................................................ [2]
(ii) State one social, economic or environmental disadvantage of one of your answers to
(d)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]

16
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows an electrical component.
Fig. 9.1
State the name of the component shown in Fig. 9.1. ......................................................... [1]
(b) In the space below, write down the truth table for a NOR gate.
[2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

17
(c) Fig. 9.2 shows the connections between two logic gates.
A D
B
E
C
Fig. 9.2
Complete the truth table shown in Table 9.1 for this combination of logic gates.
Table 9.1
inputs intermediate output

point
A B C D E
0 1 1
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
[3]
(d) Referring to a simple electron model, state what distinguishes electrical conductors from
electrical insulators.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

18
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a simple alternating current generator.
rotation
of coil
coil
N S
P
output
Q
Fig. 10.1
(a) On Fig. 10.2, sketch a graph to show how the electromotive force (e.m.f.) induced varies with
time for one revolution of the coil. Assume that the coil starts in the horizontal position, as
shown in Fig. 10.1.
Label the points on the time axis where the coil has completed 1/4 revolution and
3/4 revolution. [3]
e.m.f.
0
0 time
Fig. 10.2
(b) Explain why an e.m.f. is induced only when the coil is turning.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

19
(c) State the name of the components labelled P and Q and state their purpose.
Name: .......................................................................................................................................
Purpose: ...................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) State two possible changes that cause a larger e.m.f. to be induced.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]

20
11 (a) Americium (Am) is a radioactive isotope. A nucleus of americium contains 95 protons and
146 neutrons. It decays by emitting an α‑particle to form a nucleus of an isotope of neptunium
(Np).
Write down the nuclide equation for the decay of americium to neptunium.
[4]
(b) Ionisation smoke detectors contain americium and two small electrodes with a small voltage
between them. The air between the electrodes is ionised by α‑particles so that there is a
small electric current between the electrodes.
(i) Suggest and explain the effect of smoke on the current between the electrodes in the
smoke detector.
Suggestion: .......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Explanation: ......................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest two reasons for using an α‑particle emitter in a smoke detector.
Reason 1 ...........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Reason 2 ...........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]
Permission to reproduce items where third‑party owned material protected by copyright is included has been sought and cleared where possible. Every
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer‑related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
Assessment International Education Copyright Acknowledgements Booklet. This is produced for each series of examinations and is freely available to download
at www.cambridgeinternational.org after the live examination series.
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of the University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which itself is a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/M/J/19

* 0 4 3 1 9 9 1 6 2 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NH/CGW) 174867/3
2
1 A car accelerates from rest at time t = 0 to its maximum speed.
Fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph for the first 25 s of its motion.
40
speed
m/s
30
20
10
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
t/s
Fig. 1.1
(a) The mass of the car is 2300 kg.
For the time between t = 0 and t = 5.0 s, determine:
(i) the acceleration of the car
acceleration = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) the resultant force acting on the car.
resultant force = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

3
(b) Describe the motion of the car between t = 10 s and t = 15 s. Explain how Fig. 1.1 shows this.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Between t = 10 s and t = 15 s, the force exerted on the car due to the engine remains constant.
Suggest and explain why the car moves in the way shown by Fig. 1.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]

4
2 (a) State two properties of an object that may be changed by the action of forces.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) A chest expander is a piece of equipment used by athletes in a gym. Fig. 2.1 shows a chest
expander that consists of five identical springs connected in parallel between two handles.
springs
Fig. 2.1
Each spring has an unstretched length of 0.63 m.
Two athletes are stretching the chest expander by pulling on the two handles in opposite
directions.
(i) The springs obey Hooke’s law.
Explain what is meant by this statement.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Each athlete pulls the handle towards himself with a force of 1300 N.
1. State the tension in each spring.
tension = ........................................................ [1]
2. The chest expander stretches and each spring is now 0.94 m long.
Calculate the spring constant k of each spring.
k = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

5
(iii) State the energy changes taking place as the two athletes use their muscles to stretch
the chest expander.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a shooting competition, where air rifles fire soft metal pellets at distant targets.
target
air rifle
Fig. 3.1
When an air rifle is fired, it exerts an impulse of 0.019 N s on the pellet.
(a) Define impulse.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The pellet has a mass of 1.1 × 10–4 kg.
Determine:
(i) the speed with which the pellet leaves the rifle
speed = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) the kinetic energy of the pellet as it leaves the rifle.
kinetic energy = ........................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

7
(c) The pellet melts when it strikes the target.
Describe how the molecular structure of the liquid metal differs from that of the solid metal.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]

8
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a loudspeaker that is producing a sound wave in air of frequency 15 000 Hz.
hollow
paper
cone
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe how the cone of the loudspeaker produces this sound.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of this sound.
wavelength = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

9
(c) The loudspeaker is placed a considerable distance to the left of a barrier with a gap. The
width of the gap is double the wavelength of the sound. Sound from the loudspeaker reaches
the barrier and passes through the gap.
Fig. 4.2 shows the gap in the barrier.
barrier
barrier
On Fig. 4.2, sketch a diagram that represents the sound wave as a series of wavefronts
• travelling towards the barrier
• in the gap
• and travelling away from the barrier.

[3]
[Total: 8]

10
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a sphere that is negatively charged. The sphere is attached to a plastic stand.
plastic stand
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, draw arrows to indicate the pattern and direction of the electric field in the region
surrounding the sphere. [2]
(b) A smaller, uncharged metal sphere S is suspended by a plastic thread and brought close to
the negatively charged sphere. Fig. 5.2 shows the two spheres.
plastic thread
Fig. 5.2
(i) By drawing on Fig. 5.2, indicate the distribution of charge on S. [2]
(ii) State what happens to S.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) An earth wire is then touched against S.
Describe what happens in the wire and state how this affects the charge on S.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

11
(c) The metal sphere S is an electrical conductor. The plastic thread is an electrical insulator.
Explain this difference by referring to the structures of the two materials.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]

12
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a shower that takes in cold water. The water passes through an electric water
heater and emerges from the showerhead at a higher temperature.
showerhead
electric
water heater
Fig. 6.1
The power of the heater is 9000 W.
(a) The shower is powered by a 230 V electricity supply.
(i) Calculate the current in the heater when it is switched on.
current = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) Suggest a suitable rating for the fuse in the heater circuit.
fuse rating = ........................................................ [1]
(b) The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C). The initial temperature of the cold water
is 16 °C.
Determine the maximum mass of water that can be heated to a temperature of 35 °C in 1.0 s.
mass = ........................................................ [4]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

13
(c) A safety control in the shower switches off the shower when the water becomes dangerously
hot. The control uses a thermocouple thermometer to measure the temperature of the heated
water.
(i) Describe the structure of a thermocouple thermometer. Include a diagram in your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Suggest one reason why a thermocouple thermometer is suitable for this purpose.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 10]

14
7 The resistance of a 1.0 m length of resistance wire is 7.6 Ω. A length of this wire is taped to a metre
rule. A crocodile clip is connected to one end of the resistance wire exactly at the 0 m mark of the
rule. Fig. 7.1 shows the crocodile clip connected to terminal P.
0 m mark movable contact metre rule

l
1.0 m mark
crocodile clip
resistance wire
connecting wire
terminal P terminal Q
Fig. 7.1
A second terminal Q is connected to a movable contact using a long length of connecting wire.
The movable contact is in contact with the resistance wire at a length l from the 0 m mark on the
rule.
The movable contact is placed at different points on the resistance wire. The resistance R of the
length l of the wire depends on l.
(a) On Fig. 7.2, sketch a graph to show how R varies with l for values of l between l = 0 and
l = 1.0 m. Mark appropriate values on the axes of the graph.
R/Ω
0
0 l/m
Fig. 7.2
[2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

15
(b) Fig. 7.3 shows a battery of electromotive force (e.m.f.) 12 V connected across the 1.0 m length
of the resistance wire.
12 V
l
movable contact metre rule
resistance wire
terminal P terminal Q
Fig. 7.3
(i) State what is meant by electromotive force (e.m.f.).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate:
1. the current in the resistance wire
current = ........................................................ [2]
2. the potential difference (p.d.) between terminal P and terminal Q when l = 0.35 m
p.d. = ........................................................ [1]
3. the charge that passes through the resistance wire in 5.5 minutes.
charge = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 9]

16
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a ray of red light incident on one side of a glass prism in air.
glass prism
red light
Fig. 8.1
For red light, the refractive index of glass is nR.
(a) The angle of incidence is 53° and the angle of refraction in the glass is 30°.
(i) Calculate nR.
nR = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) On Fig. 8.1, sketch a line to indicate the path of the red light when it emerges from the
glass prism. Label this path R. [1]
(iii) Explain why the quantity refractive index does not have a unit.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) For violet light, the refractive index nV of glass is slightly larger than nR.
(i) A ray of violet light is incident on the prism along the same path as the ray of red light.
On Fig. 8.1, sketch a line to indicate the path of the violet light in the prism and when it
emerges into the air. Label this path V. [1]
(ii) When a ray of white light is incident on the prism, dispersion produces a continuous
spectrum of coloured light.
State how the speed of light in glass depends on its frequency. Explain how this is shown
by the dispersion of white light in the prism.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19
18
9 (a) The chemical symbol of the element lithium is Li. The proton number of lithium is 3.
Fig. 9.1 is a representation of a nucleus of a radioactive isotope of lithium that is about to

decay.
Fig. 9.1
(i) Write down, using nuclide notation, the symbol that represents this isotope of lithium.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) This isotope of lithium decays by β-particle emission to form another nucleus.
Complete Fig. 9.2 to represent this decay by:
• using the same representation as in Fig. 9.1 and in the space after the arrow, draw
a diagram of the nucleus formed by the decay
• writing the name of the particle that is identical to a β-particle on the answer line
provided.
+
.............................................
Fig. 9.2
[3]
(b) A radiation detector is set up in a laboratory where there are no radioactive samples.
On six separate occasions, the detector is switched on for 1.0 minute and the background
count is recorded. The counts are:
23 27 25 24 20 25
(i) State why the readings are not all identical.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest a possible source for this background radiation.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

19
(iii) A sample containing only one radioactive isotope is brought into the laboratory. The
half-life of the isotope is 15 hours.
The sample is placed near to the radiation detector in this laboratory. The detector is
switched on and, after 1.0 minute, a count of 440 is recorded.
The sample is left next to the detector and the experiment is repeated 45 hours later.
The detector is switched on for 1.0 minute.
Predict the reading for the count obtained on this occasion.
reading ........................................................ [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2019 0625/41/O/N/19

* 6 5 2 4 3 9 4 7 5 2 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (NF/CB) 174868/3
2
1 Fig. 1.1 is the top view of a rectangular paddling pool of constant depth. The pool is filled with
sea water.
44.0 m
20.0 m
(a) The volume of the sea water in the pool is 264 m3.
Calculate the depth of the pool.
depth = ........................................................ [3]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

3
(b) The mass of the sea water in the pool is 2.70 × 105 kg.
Calculate the density of the sea water. Give your answer to 3 significant figures.
density = ........................................................ [2]
(c) Calculate the pressure due to the sea water at the bottom of the pool.
pressure = ........................................................ [2]
(d) State a suitable instrument for measuring the dimensions given in Fig. 1.1.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]

4
2 (a) State the two conditions which must be true for an object to be in equilibrium.
condition 1 ................................................................................................................................
condition 2 ................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a uniform metre rule PQ in equilibrium.
10 cm 40 cm
P Q
pivot
0.50 N
Fig. 2.1
The distance PQ is 100 cm. The mass of the metre rule is 0.12 kg and its weight is W.
(i) On Fig 2.1, draw and label:
1. an arrow to show the force W acting on PQ at the centre of mass
2. an arrow to show the force R acting on PQ at the pivot.

[2]
(ii) By taking moments about the pivot, calculate F.
F = ........................................................ [4]
(iii) Calculate R.
R = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

5
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a gas contained in a cylinder enclosed by a piston.
pressure gauge
piston
cylinder
gas
Fig. 3.1
(a) Describe, in terms of momentum of the molecules, how a pressure is exerted on the walls of
the cylinder.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The piston is pushed into the cylinder. The volume decreases from 820 cm3 to 330 cm3 . The
pressure gauge measures the pressure after compression as 20 000 Pa. The temperature
remains constant.
Calculate the value of the pressure before the gas was compressed.
pressure = ........................................................ [3]
[Total: 6]

6
4 (a) A student carries out an experiment to determine the thermal capacity of a metal block. The
block is heated by an electric heater for 23 minutes. The current in the heater is 3.0 A at a
potential difference (p.d.) of 12 V.
The temperature of the block rises from 20 °C to 70 °C.
Calculate the thermal capacity of the block.
thermal capacity = ........................................................ [4]
(b) 1. Two metal spheres of different diameters are heated to 900 °C in a hot oven. The two
spheres are removed from the oven.
State and explain any difference in the initial rates of emission of radiation of thermal energy
between the two spheres.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. One hot sphere is now heated in a hotter oven.
State and explain any effect on the rate of emission of radiation of thermal energy from that
sphere when it is removed from the hotter oven.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

7
5 (a) One difference between a longitudinal wave and a transverse wave is that a longitudinal
wave consists of compressions and rarefactions.
(i) Explain the terms compression and rarefaction using ideas about particles.
compression ......................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
rarefaction .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(ii) Describe one other way in which longitudinal wave motion differs from transverse wave
motion.
Longitudinal wave motion ..................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
Transverse wave motion ...................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) (i) A sound wave of frequency 0.120 kHz travels through a rock at a speed of 3500 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of the wave.
wavelength = ........................................................ [3]
(ii) The wave travels from the rock into the air.
State and explain whether the wave will be audible to a healthy human ear.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 9]
8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows an empty container and an observer’s eye. There is a small coin at position O.
The observer is unable to see the coin.
eye
Fig. 6.1
The observer and the coin stay in the same position and the container is filled with water. The
observer can now see the coin.
(i) Explain why the coin can be seen by the observer.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State the name of the wave process which occurs as the light passes from the water into
the air.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Explain why the image of the coin is a virtual image.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) State the speed of light in air.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The refractive index of water is 1.3.
Calculate the speed of light in water.
speed of light in water = ........................................................ [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

9
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a coil of wire wound on a thin plastic cylinder. The plastic has no effect on any
magnetic field. The galvanometer is extremely sensitive.
magnet
coil of wire
S N B
A
small trolley
plastic cylinder
Fig. 7.1
A magnet is fixed to a small trolley that runs without friction on a track through the cylinder
and coil.
(i) The trolley is released from point A so it runs through the coil from right to left.
State and explain what is observed on the galvanometer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The trolley is now released from point B so it runs through the coil from right to left again.
State what is observed on the galvanometer and explain why it is different to your answer
in (a)(i).
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

10
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows an extension lead used to supply power to a 3 kW electric heater on a cool
evening.
damp grass
3 kW electric
heater
cut in outer
insulation
plug and socket

lying on grass
paved area
extension lead designed
for use with a 25 W lamp
Fig. 7.2
State and explain three dangers with this arrangement.
danger 1 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
danger 2 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
danger 3 ...................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[4]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

11
8 (a) A wire of length 2.0 m and cross-sectional area 0.40 mm2 has a resistance of 0.14 Ω.
Calculate the resistance of another wire of the same material of length 3.0 m and
cross-sectional area 0.90 mm2.
resistance = ..................................................... Ω [4]
(b) A student is designing a digital electronic circuit. Fig. 8.1 shows her partly completed design.
A C
B D
Fig. 8.1
(i) Table 8.1 is a truth table.

Complete the columns in this truth table to show the values for input B in the circuit.
Table 8.1
Input A Input B Point C Point D Output O

1 0 0 1
0 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
0 1 0 0
[2]
(ii) The column O in the truth table shows the desired output values for the circuit.
On Fig. 8.1, complete the circuit to achieve these output values. Label any gate used. [2]
[Total: 8]

12
9 (a) Describe what is meant by the term electric field.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 9.1 shows two parallel conducting plates connected to a battery.
conducting plate
Fig. 9.1
On Fig. 9.1, draw five lines to show the electric field pattern between the two plates. [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

13
(c) When fully charged, a 1.2 V rechargeable battery can deliver a current of 210 mA for 10 hours.
(i) Calculate the charge that can be delivered by the fully charged battery.
charge = ........................................................ [3]
(ii) Calculate the energy stored in the battery when fully charged.
energy stored = ........................................................ [2]
(iii) State the type of energy stored when the battery is charged.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]

14
10 (a) The nucleus of a hydrogen atom is a proton. The mass of a proton is m and the size of the
charge on a proton is e.
Complete Table 10.1. Express your answers in terms of m and e. Three spaces have already
been completed.
Table 10.1
particle or emission mass charge

proton m e
neutron m
γ-ray
nucleus of helium-4
( 42He)
[4]
(b) Many schools and colleges use radioactive isotopes for teaching and research. Describe how
these radioactive isotopes are handled, used and stored in a safe way.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2019 0625/42/O/N/19

* 0 3 3 3 4 7 9 9 2 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes

DC (PQ/SG) 174869/4
2
1 Fig. 1.1 is the top view of a tank in an aquarium. The tank is filled with salt water.
1.6 m
1.1 m
1.0 m
3.2 m
The depth of the water in the tank is 2.0 m.
(a) Calculate the volume of the water in the tank.
volume = ........................................................ [3]
(b) The density of the water in the tank is 1.1 × 103 kg / m3.
Calculate the mass of the water in the tank.
mass = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

3
(c) Calculate the pressure due to the water at a level of 0.80 m above the base of the tank.
pressure = ........................................................ [3]
[Total: 8]

4
2 (a) (i) State, in words, the equation that defines the moment of a force.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) State what is meant by the moment of a force.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) Force is a vector quantity.
Explain what is meant by the term vector.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a tower crane used to lift a load on a construction site.
counterweight
load
Fig. 2.1
Explain how the counterweight prevents the crane from toppling over.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

5
3 (a) Fig. 3.1 shows a waterfall.
Fig. 3.1
(i) Describe the main energy transfer which is taking place as the water falls.
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The speed of the water as it hits the bottom is 21 m / s.
Calculate the height h of the waterfall.
height = ........................................................ [3]
(iii) State and explain any assumption you made in (ii).
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) The Sun is the source of energy for most energy resources used to produce electricity.
State two energy resources that have another source for their energy.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]

6
4 Solids have a fixed shape. Liquids adapt to the shape of their container. Gases fill their container.
Explain in terms of forces between molecules and arrangement of molecules, why solids, liquids
and gases have these properties.
Solids ...............................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Liquids ..............................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
Gases ...............................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
..........................................................................................................................................................
[6]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

7
5 An electric kettle contains water at a temperature of 19 °C. The kettle has a power rating of 3.0 kW
and is switched on for 3.5 minutes.
(a) Calculate the energy supplied to the kettle by the electricity supply.
electrical energy = ........................................................ [3]
(b) At 3.5 minutes, the temperature of the water reaches 100 °C. The volume of the water in
the kettle is 1700 cm3 and its density is 1.0 g / cm3. The specific heat capacity of water is
4200 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the thermal energy gained by the water.
thermal energy = ........................................................ [5]
(c) Calculate the efficiency of the kettle.
efficiency = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 10]

8
6 Fig. 6.1 represents wavefronts of a sound wave travelling in air from left to right.
Fig. 6.1
(a) State the name given to the:
(i) region around A in the diagram ............................................................... [1]
(ii) region around B in the diagram. ............................................................... [1]
(b) On Fig. 6.1, draw a double-headed arrow to show one wavelength. [1]
(c) The loudness of the sound increases at the same pitch.
State and explain any change there would be in the pattern of wavefronts shown in Fig. 6.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(d) The wave passes into water.
State and explain any change in the pattern of wavefronts shown in Fig. 6.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

9
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows the position of a converging lens, its principal axis and an object O.
principal
axis
F O F
lens
Fig. 7.1
Each principal focus of the lens is labelled F.
On Fig. 7.1, draw a ray diagram to locate the position of the image formed by the lens.
(b) Describe the nature of the image I.
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Images formed by lenses sometimes have coloured edges.
Suggest a reason for this.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 6]

10
8 (a) Fig. 8.1 shows a negatively charged conducting sphere.
− −
− −
− −
− −
Fig. 8.1
On Fig. 8.1, draw the electric field pattern around the sphere. [2]
(b) The current in an electrical device is 0.21 A.
Calculate the charge that flows during a 75 s period of time.
charge = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

11
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit containing an LED and two resistors in parallel, each of resistance R.
R R
3.7 V
Fig. 9.1
The normal operating voltage of the LED is 2.1 V and the normal current is 0.19 A.
(a) (i) The potential difference (p.d.) across the LED is measured with a voltmeter.
On Fig. 9.1, draw the symbol for this voltmeter connected to the circuit. [1]
(ii) The current in the LED is measured with an ammeter.
On Fig. 9.1, draw the symbol for this ammeter connected to the circuit. [1]
(b) Calculate the value of R when the LED is operating normally.
R = ........................................................ [5]
[Total: 7]

12
10 (a) A magnet and a coil are attached separately to a door and a door frame as shown in
Fig. 10.1.
The purpose of the arrangement is to activate a circuit connected to an LED indicator when
the door is opening or closing. This will provide a visual indication that the door is being used.
indicator
coil
magnet
S
door frame
door
Fig. 10.1
Initially, the door is closed and then it is opened.
(i) Explain why the indicator comes on and then goes off when the door is opened.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The door shuts. The indicator comes on more brightly but for a shorter time than it
did in (i). Suggest and explain why this happens.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

13
(b) A circuit breaker is recommended for use with an electric lawnmower.
State two reasons for this recommendation.
reason 1 .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
reason 2 .....................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]

14
11 (a) The circles shown in Fig. 11.1 represent three gold nuclei. Three α-particles are approaching
the gold nuclei.
α-particle
α-particle
α-particle
Fig. 11.1
On Fig. 11.1, complete the path of each α-particle. [3]
(b) A detector of radioactivity in a laboratory indicates an average of 16 counts / min when no

radioactive samples are present. A radioactive sample of half-life 1.5 days is placed close to
the detector, which indicates a count rate of 208 counts / min.
Calculate the count rate that is indicated 6 days later.
count rate = ...................................... counts / min [4]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

15
(c) The waste from nuclear power stations includes the isotopes technetium-99, tin-126 and
selenium-79. These isotopes are radioactive with half-lives of many thousands of years.
State three economic and environmental consequences of producing this waste.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2019 0625/43/O/N/19

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 6 5 5 3 4 5 9 9 9 7 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes
You must answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are needed.
INSTRUCTIONS
● Answer all questions.
● Use a black or dark blue pen. You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams or graphs.
● Write your name, centre number and candidate number in the boxes at the top of the page.
● Write your answer to each question in the space provided.
● Do not use an erasable pen or correction fluid.
● Do not write on any bar codes.
● You may use a calculator.
● You should show all your working and use appropriate units.
● Take the weight of 1.0 kg to be 10 N (acceleration of free fall = 10 m / s2).
INFORMATION
● The total mark for this paper is 80.
● The number of marks for each question or part question is shown in brackets [ ].
This document has 16 pages. Blank pages are indicated.
DC (JC/JG) 187443/4
2
1 A rocket is launched vertically upwards from the ground. The rocket travels with uniform
acceleration from rest. After 8.0 s, the speed of the rocket is 120 m / s.
(a) Calculate the acceleration of the rocket.
acceleration = ........................................................ [2]
(b) (i) On Fig. 1.1, draw the graph for the motion of the rocket in the first 8.0 s.
200
speed
m/s
150
100
50
0
0 5 10 15 20 25
time / s
Fig. 1.1
[1]
(ii) Use the graph to determine the height of the rocket at 8.0 s.
height = ........................................................ [2]
(iii) From time = 8.0 s to time = 20.0 s, the rocket rises with increasing speed but with
decreasing acceleration.
From time = 20.0 s to time = 25.0 s, the rocket has a constant speed of less than 200 m / s.
On Fig. 1.1, draw the graph for this motion. [3]

[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20
3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows an athlete crossing the finishing line in a race. As she crosses the finishing line, her
speed is 10.0 m / s. She slows down to a speed of 4.0 m / s.
Fig. 2.1
(a) The mass of the athlete is 71 kg. Calculate the impulse applied to her as she slows down.
impulse = ........................................................ [3]
(b) (i) Define impulse in terms of force and time.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The athlete takes 1.2 s to slow down from a speed of 10.0 m / s to a speed of 4.0 m / s.
Calculate the average resultant force applied to the athlete as she slows down.
force = ........................................................ [2]
(c) Calculate the force required to give a mass of 71 kg an acceleration of 6.4 m / s2.
force = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 8]
4
3 Fig. 3.1 shows a model of a wind turbine used to demonstrate the use of wind energy to generate
electricity. The wind is blowing towards the model, as shown.
turbine blades
circular area swept out

by turbine blades
wind
A
V
Fig. 3.1
(a) The mass of air passing through the circular area swept out by the turbine blades each
second is 7.5 kg. The kinetic energy of the air that passes through this circular area each
second is 240 J.
(i) Calculate the speed of the air.
speed = ........................................................ [3]
(ii) The kinetic energy of the air drives a generator. State the input power of the air passing
through the turbine blades.
input power = ........................................................ [1]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

5
(b) The output current of the generator is 2.0 A. The output potential difference (p.d.) of the
generator is 11 V.
(i) Calculate the output power of the generator.
output power = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) Calculate the efficiency of the wind turbine.
efficiency = .................................................... % [2]
(c) The density of air is 1.3 kg / m3.

Calculate the volume of air passing through the circular area swept out by the turbine blades
each second.
volume = ........................................................ [2]
[Total: 10]

6
4 (a) Define the specific latent heat of fusion of a substance.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Small pieces of ice at 0 °C are added to 0.35 kg of water. The initial temperature of the water is
24.5 °C. The temperature of the water decreases to 0 °C. The water loses 35 000 J of thermal
energy as it cools. All of the ice added to the water melts.
The specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 3.3 × 105 J / kg.
Calculate:
(i) the specific heat capacity of water
specific heat capacity = ........................................................ [2]
(ii) the mass of ice added to the water.
mass = ........................................................ [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

7
5 (a) Complete the sentences with words that describe the main process of thermal energy transfer
in each case.
A man goes for a walk on a cold day. He touches a metal gate, which removes thermal
energy from his hands by ................................. . He holds the sides of a cup containing a
hot drink. His hands gain thermal energy by ................................. . Some farm workers have
lit a fire. The man warms his hands by the side of the fire. His hands gain thermal energy by
................................. . [3]
(b) Describe in terms of particles the transfer of thermal energy through the metal of the gate
after transfer from the man’s hands.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Fig. 5.1 shows a car on a sunny day in a hot country.
windscreen
object A
Fig. 5.1
The object labelled A is placed inside the windscreen. It is used by the owner of the car to
reduce the temperature rise of the air in the car.
Ring the most suitable material for the outer surface of object A. Explain your choice.
dull black dull white shiny black shiny white
explanation ................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows crests of a water wave moving from left to right in a harbour.
crest of wave
harbour wall
Fig. 6.1
(i) On Fig. 6.1, draw three more crests to the right of point A. [2]
(ii) State the name of the wave process that occurs as the wave passes point A.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 6.2 shows the crests of another wave moving from left to right in a different part of the
harbour. This wave moves from deep water to shallow water.
deep water shallow water
crest of wave
Fig. 6.2
(i) On Fig. 6.2, draw an arrow to show the direction of movement of the wave after it has
passed into the shallow water. [1]
(ii) State the name of the process that occurs as the wave passes into the shallow water.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

9
(iii) Complete Table 6.1 to state whether each of the properties of the wave increases,
decreases or stays the same as the wave passes into the shallow water.
Table 6.1
property effect
wavelength
frequency
speed
[3]
[Total: 8]

10
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows a converging lens and the image I formed when an object is placed to the left
of the lens. The principal focuses are labelled A and B and the centre of the lens is labelled C.
(i) On Fig. 7.1, draw two rays to locate the position of the object.
Draw the object and label it O.
lens
A C B
I
Fig. 7.1
[3]
(ii) Ring all of the following distances that are equal to the focal length of the lens.
AB AC CB 2AB
[2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

11
(b) Fig. 7.2 shows green light passing through a triangular glass block.
Fig. 7.2
Red light enters the triangular glass block shown in Fig. 7.2 along the same path as the green
light.
(i) On Fig. 7.2, draw the path of the red light within the triangular glass block. [1]
Fig. 7.3 shows green light passing through a rectangular glass block.
Red light enters the rectangular glass block shown in Fig. 7.3 along the same path as the
green light.
Fig. 7.3
On Fig. 7.3:
(ii) draw the path of the red light within the rectangular glass block [1]
(iii) draw the path of the red light after leaving the rectangular glass block. [1]
[Total: 8]

12
8 Fig. 8.1 shows a circuit.
12 V
A 3.0 Ω
2.0 Ω
6.0 Ω
X Y
2.0 m
Fig. 8.1
The lamp has a resistance of 3.0 Ω. Line XY represents a uniform resistance wire of resistance
6.0 Ω.
(a) Calculate the reading on the ammeter.
ammeter reading = ........................................................ [2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

13
(b) Fig. 8.2 shows the circuit with a different connection to the resistance wire and an added
resistor. The length XY of the whole resistance wire is 2.0 m. The contact is made at Q where
the distance XQ is 0.60 m.
12 V
A 3.0 Ω
1.5 Ω 2.0 Ω
0.60 m
X Q Y
2.0 m
Fig. 8.2
Calculate the resistance of the circuit.
resistance = ........................................................ [4]
[Total: 6]

14
9 (a) State the name of the logic gate with the symbol shown in Fig. 9.1.
Fig. 9.1
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) State the name of the logic gate with the truth table shown in Table 9.1.
Table 9.1
input output
0 1
1 0
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) Fig. 9.2 shows a digital circuit.
A C
E
B
Fig. 9.2
Complete the truth table in Table 9.2 for this circuit for all possible combinations of input.
Table 9.2
A B C D E
1 1
1 0
1 0
0 0
[4]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

15
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 is a simplified top view of a flat coil. There is an alternating current (a.c.) in the coil.
Fig. 10.1
Describe the magnetic effect of this alternating current.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a pan placed above the coil. The base of the pan is made of steel.
pan
coil
Fig. 10.2
State what quantity is induced in the base of the pan.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) The pan contains water.
State and explain the effect of the quantity induced in part (b) on the temperature of the water
in the pan.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]

16
11 (a) The isotope hydrogen-1 has a proton number of 1 and a nucleon number of 1.
Two isotopes of helium are helium-3 and helium-4.
Helium-3 has a proton number of 2 and a nucleon number of 3.
Helium-4 has a nucleon number of 4.
Complete Table 11.1 for neutral atoms of these isotopes of helium.
Table 11.1
helium-3 helium-4
number of neutrons
number of electrons
mass compared to a neutral

atom of hydrogen-1
[3]
(b) An experiment takes place in a laboratory shielded from all background radiation. A sample
of radioactive material is wrapped in aluminium foil of thickness 0.1 mm. A detector of ionising
radiation placed 1 cm from the foil records a reading.
A piece of aluminium of thickness 5 mm is placed between the detector and the foil. The
detector reading drops to zero.
State and explain any type of radiation passing through the aluminium foil.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
To avoid the issue of disclosure of answer-related information to candidates, all copyright acknowledgements are reproduced online in the Cambridge
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/F/M/20

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 4 4 5 4 8 7 2 4 9 8 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (ST/CT) 194261/3
2
1 An aeroplane of mass 2.5 × 105 kg lands with a speed of 62 m / s, on a horizontal runway at time
t = 0. The aeroplane decelerates uniformly as it travels along the runway in a straight line until it
reaches a speed of 6.0 m / s at t = 35 s.
(a) Calculate:
(i) the deceleration of the aeroplane in the 35 s after it lands
deceleration = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) the resultant force acting on the aeroplane as it decelerates
force = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) the momentum of the aeroplane when its speed is 6.0 m / s.
momentum = ......................................................... [2]
(b) At t = 35 s, the aeroplane stops decelerating and moves along the runway at a constant speed
of 6.0 m / s for a further 15 s.
On Fig. 1.1, sketch the shape of the graph for the distance travelled by the aeroplane along
the runway between t = 0 and t = 50 s. You are not required to calculate distance values.
distance
0
0 35 50
time / s
Fig. 1.1
[3]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

3
(c) As the aeroplane decelerates, its kinetic energy decreases.
Suggest what happens to this energy.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 10]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 is the extension–load graph for a light spring S.
30
extension / cm
20
10
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
load / N
Fig. 2.1
(a) State the range of loads for which S obeys Hooke’s law.
from ....................................................... to .......................................................... [1]
(b) Using information from Fig. 2.1, determine the spring constant k of spring S.
k = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

5
(c) A second spring, identical to spring S, is attached to spring S. The two springs are attached
to a rod, as shown in Fig. 2.2. A load of 4.0 N is suspended from the bottom of spring S. The
arrangement is in equilibrium.
rod
second spring
spring S
4.0 N load
Fig. 2.2
(i) State the name of the form of energy stored in the two springs when they are stretched.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Determine the extension of the arrangement in Fig. 2.2.
extension = ................................................... cm [1]
(iii) The load is carefully increased to 6.0 N in total.
Calculate the distance moved by the load to the new equilibrium position as the load
increases from 4.0 N to 6.0 N.
distance moved = ......................................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

6
3 Fig. 3.1 shows gas trapped in the sealed end of a tube by a dense liquid.
open end
sealed
trapped gas end
cm3
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
dense liquid
Fig. 3.1
The scale marked on the sealed end of the tube is calibrated to read the volume of gas trapped
above the liquid surface. Fig. 3.1 shows that initially the volume V1 of the gas is 60 cm3.
The pressure of the atmosphere is 1.0 × 105 Pa.
(a) State how Fig. 3.1 shows that the pressure of the trapped gas is equal to the pressure of the
atmosphere.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Explain, in terms of the momentum of its molecules, why the trapped gas exerts a pressure
on the walls of the tube.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

7
(c) More of the dense liquid is poured into the open end of the tube. The level of the liquid surface
in both the sealed and the open ends of the tube rises as shown in Fig. 3.2. The temperature
of the trapped gas and atmospheric pressure both remain constant.
open end
15 cm
sealed
trapped gas end
cm3
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
dense liquid
Fig. 3.2
(i) In the sealed end of the tube, the volume V2 of the trapped gas is 50 cm3. In the open
end of the tube, the liquid surface is 15 cm above the new level in the sealed tube.
Calculate the pressure p2 of the trapped gas.
pressure p2 = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate the density of the liquid in the tube.
density = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

8
4 Water has a specific heat capacity of 4200 J / (kg °C) and a boiling point of 100 °C.
(a) State what is meant by boiling point.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) A mass of 0.30 kg of water at its boiling point is poured into a copper container which is
initially at 11 °C. After a few seconds, the temperature of the container and the water are both
95 °C.
(i) Calculate the energy transferred from the water.
energy transferred = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate the thermal capacity of the copper container.
thermal capacity of the copper container = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) Water from the container evaporates and the temperature of the remaining water
decreases slowly.
Explain, in terms of molecules, why evaporation causes the temperature of the remaining
water to decrease.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

9
5 The distance between the centre of a thin converging lens and each principal focus is 5.0 cm.
(a) Describe what is meant by the term principal focus for a thin converging lens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The lens is used as a magnifying glass to produce an image I of an object O.
(i) Underline the terms that describe the nature of the image produced by a magnifying
glass. [2]
(ii) Fig. 5.1 is a full-scale diagram of the lens and the image I.
centre of lens
1 cm
1 cm
Fig. 5.1 (full-scale)
1. On Fig. 5.1, mark both principal focuses and label each of them F. [1]
2. By drawing on Fig. 5.1, find the position of object O and add object O to the diagram.
[3]
(iii) Using Fig. 5.1, determine the distance of object O from the centre of the lens.
distance = ......................................................... [1]
[Total: 9]

10
6 The speed of sound in air is 340 m / s.
(a) Calculate the range of wavelengths for sounds that are audible by a healthy human ear.
wavelengths range from ................................. to ................................. [2]
(b) Sound waves are longitudinal waves.
Describe how a longitudinal wave differs from a transverse wave.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Fig. 6.1 shows a band in front of a building.
Fig. 6.1
The drum produces a low frequency sound. Other musical instruments produce a high
frequency sound. These sounds are equally loud.
A young man at the side of the building hears the drum but not the high frequency sounds
from the other musical instruments.
Explain why this happens.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

11
7 An electromagnet consists of a solenoid X that is made of copper wire. The solenoid contains an
iron core.
(a) Explain why:
(i) the structure of copper makes it a suitable material for the wire
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) iron is a suitable material for the core of an electromagnet.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows the electromagnet inside a second solenoid Y.
terminals of Y
solenoid X iron core
solenoid Y
a.c. power supply
Fig. 7.1
(i) Describe and explain what happens in solenoid Y when solenoid X is connected to an
alternating current (a.c.) power supply.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) A switch and a lamp are connected in series with the terminals of solenoid Y. When the
switch is closed, the lamp lights up at normal brightness.
Describe and explain what happens to the current in solenoid X when the switch is
closed.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
12
8 The power supply used in an electric vehicle contains 990 rechargeable cells each of electromotive
force (e.m.f.) 1.2 V.
The cells are contained in packs in which all the cells are in series with each other. The e.m.f. of
each pack is 54 V.
(a) Calculate the number of packs in the power supply.
number of packs = ......................................................... [2]
(b) When in use, each pack supplies a current of 3.5 A.
(i) Calculate the rate at which each cell is transferring chemical energy to electrical energy.
rate of energy transfer = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) The packs are connected in parallel to supply a large current to drive the electric vehicle.
Explain why it is necessary to use thick wires to carry this current.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

13
9 (a) Describe how a digital signal differs from an analogue signal. You may draw a diagram.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) (i) In the appropriate box, draw the symbol for an AND gate and the symbol for an OR gate.
AND gate OR gate
[1]
(ii) State how the behaviour of an AND gate differs from that of an OR gate.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]

14
(c) An arrangement of logic gates A, B and C is shown in Fig. 9.1. The arrangement has two
inputs, X and Y and two outputs P and Q.
X B
P
Y
Fig. 9.1
Output P of logic gate B has logic state 1 (high).
(i) Determine the logic states of the two inputs of logic gate B.
upper input = ...............................................................
lower input = ...............................................................

[1]
(ii) Determine and explain the logic state of output Q.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
logic state of Q = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

15
10 Fig. 10.1 represents a neutral atom of an isotope of element X.
Fig. 10.1
(a) State one similarity between this atom and a neutral atom of a different isotope of element X.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The isotope of element X is radioactive. It decays to form an isotope of element Y by emitting
a β-particle.
(i) Using Fig. 10.1 deduce the nuclide notation for the isotope of Y produced by this decay.
......
nuclide notation:
...... Y [3]
(ii) β-particles ionise the air they pass through less strongly than the same number of
α-particles.
Suggest why this is so.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/M/J/20

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 5 1 2 0 4 7 0 8 0 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (ST/CT) 194263/3
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the speed–time graph of a person on a journey.
On the journey, he walks and then waits for a bus. He then travels by bus. He gets off the bus and
waits for two minutes. He then walks again. His journey takes 74 minutes.
50
speed
km / h
40
30
20
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80
time / min
Fig. 1.1
(a) For the whole journey calculate:
(i) the distance travelled
distance = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) the average speed.
average speed = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/M/J/20

3
(b) State and explain which feature of a speed–time graph shows acceleration.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) State and explain the acceleration of the person at time = 40 minutes.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a train.
Fig. 2.1
The total mass of the train and its passengers is 750 000 kg. The train is travelling at a speed of
84 m / s. The driver applies the brakes and the train takes 80 s to slow down to a speed of 42 m / s.
(a) Calculate the impulse applied to the train as it slows down.
impulse = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Calculate the average resultant force applied to the train as it slows down.
force = ......................................................... [2]
(c) Suggest how the shape of the train helps it to travel at high speeds.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(d) The train took 80 s to reduce its speed from 84 m / s to 42 m / s. Explain why, with the same
braking force, the train takes more than 80 s to reduce its speed from 42 m / s to zero.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(e) On a wet day, the train travels a greater distance before it stops along the same track. The
train has the same speed of 84 m / s before the brakes are applied.
Suggest a reason for this.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/M/J/20
5
3 (a) A solar panel receives energy from the Sun at a rate of 5.0 kW.
Thermal energy is transferred from the solar panel to water with an efficiency of 20%.
Cold water of mass 15 kg enters the solar panel every hour.
The specific heat capacity of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the temperature increase of the water.
temperature increase = .....................................................°C [4]
(b) State and explain one advantage and one disadvantage of heating the water in a solar panel
compared with heating the water in a coal-burning boiler.
advantage .................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
disadvantage ............................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
[Total: 8]

6
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a liquid-in-glass thermometer without a temperature scale.

The liquid inside the thermometer has a melting point of –39 °C.
Fig. 4.1
(a) Describe simple experiments to mark the positions of the fixed points on this liquid-in-glass
thermometer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) A scientist is measuring temperatures at the South Pole. These temperatures have a minimum
value of –90 °C.
State why the liquid used in the thermometer in Fig. 4.1 would not be suitable for this scientist.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(c) State a design change that:
(i) increases the sensitivity of a liquid-in-glass thermometer
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) increases the range of a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(d) State the property of the liquid which ensures that the scale on a liquid-in-glass thermometer
is linear.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/M/J/20

7
5 Fig. 5.1 shows crests of a wave approaching a barrier where the wave is reflected.
crest
barrier
Fig. 5.1
(a) On Fig. 5.1, draw three crests of the reflected wave. [3]
(b) The wave has a wavelength of 36 cm and a speed of 1.2 m / s.
frequency = ......................................................... [3]
(c) Complete the following sentences.
An echo is the name for a reflected .................................................................. wave.
The waves that form an echo are a type of longitudinal wave. Longitudinal waves are made
up of .................................................................. and rarefactions.

[2]
[Total: 8]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows an arrangement of glass prisms inside a box. The angles of the prisms are
45°, 45° and 90°.
box
prism 1
incident
ray of light
wall prism 2
eye
This is a device used to view objects that are behind a wall.

The incident ray of light undergoes total internal reflection in the prisms.
On Fig. 6.1, complete the path of the ray through the device and show the ray as it emerges
from the box. [3]
(b) Show that the refractive index of glass with a critical angle of 45° is 1.41.
[2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/M/J/20

9
7 (a) A student makes a transformer that uses an alternating current (a.c.) supply with an
electromotive force (e.m.f.) of 12.0 V to induce an output potential difference (p.d.) of 2.0 V.
The student is provided with two lengths of insulated wire and the U-shaped piece of iron
shown in Fig. 7.1.
iron
Fig. 7.1
(i) Complete and label Fig. 7.1 to show the transformer connected to the supply and the
output from the transformer. [3]
(ii) Explain the function of the piece of iron in the transformer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) The output of the transformer is connected to a lamp. The current in the lamp is 100 mA.
The transformer is 100% efficient.
Calculate the input current to the transformer.
current = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Another transformer is used in a school laboratory to step down a mains supply with a p.d. of
110 V to 12 V. This transformer is mounted in a metal case.
State and explain an essential safety feature required for this arrangement.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]

10
8 (a) A light-emitting diode (LED) is a diode that emits light when there is a current in it. Draw a
circuit diagram showing an LED, connected so that it is lit, in series with a battery and a fixed
resistor. Use standard electrical symbols.
[4]
(b) The p.d. across the LED when lit is 3.1 V and the current in the LED is 0.030 A.
Calculate the value of the resistance of the LED when lit.
resistance = ......................................................... [2]
(c) Fig. 8.1 shows a power supply of e.m.f. 10.5 V connected in series with a lamp and a heater.
The p.d. across the lamp is 2.1 V and the current in the lamp is 1.5 A.
Fig. 8.1
Calculate:
(i) the resistance of the heater
resistance = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) the power of the heater.
power = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/M/J/20
11
9 (a) Complete the truth table shown in Table 9.1 for a NAND gate.
Table 9.1

0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
[1]
(b) The circuit shown in Fig. 9.1 contains two different types of gate, labelled X and Y.
A C
X
B
X E
Y D
Fig. 9.1
Table 9.2 shows a partially completed truth table for this circuit.
Table 9.2
input intermediate point output

A B C D E
0 0 0 0
0 1 1 0
1 0 1 0
1 1 1 1
(i) From Table 9.2, deduce the name of logic gate Y.
Ring your answer from the list.
AND NAND NOR NOT OR [1]
(ii) Complete the truth table in Table 9.2. [2]
(c) There is a current of 3.0 A in a copper wire. Calculate how many electrons pass through the
copper wire every 60 s. The charge on an electron is 1.6 × 10–19 C.
number of electrons = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]
12
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a vacuum tube with a radioactive source. The radioactive source emits α-particles,
β-particles and γ -rays. There is a very strong magnetic field between the N pole and the S pole of
the magnet.
lead cylinder with narrow
vacuum central hole
radioactive source
N
S
α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays
Fig. 10.1
(a) The lead cylinder has a narrow central hole. State and explain the effect of the lead cylinder.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Describe the paths of the α-particles, β-particles and γ -rays as they pass through the magnetic
field. Explain your answers.
(i) α-particles
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) β-particles
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) γ -rays
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/M/J/20

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 5 4 0 8 5 1 2 0 6 3 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (ST/CT) 194262/3
2
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 1.1 shows two speed–time graphs, A and B, and two distance–time graphs, C and D.
speed speed
A
B
0 0
0 time 0 time
distance distance
C
D
0 0
0 time 0 time
Fig. 1.1
Describe the motion shown by:
(i) graph A ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) graph B ..............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) graph C .............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iv) graph D. ............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

3
2 A scientist fills a container with sea water. The container has dimensions 30 cm × 30 cm × 40 cm.
The density of sea water is 1020 kg / m3.
(a) Calculate the mass of the sea water in the container.
mass = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a submarine. The submarine is fully submerged in the sea.
hatch
top surface
submarine
Fig. 2.1
(i) The atmospheric pressure is 100 kPa and the total pressure on the top surface of the
submarine is 500 kPa.
Calculate the depth of the top surface of the submarine below the surface of the sea.
depth = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) A hatch (an opening door) on the top surface of the submarine has an area of 0.62 m2.
Calculate the downward force on the hatch due to the total pressure on the top surface
of the submarine.
force = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]

4
3 In a double-decker bus there are two passenger compartments, one above the other.
(a) Fig. 3.1 shows a double-decker bus on a tilted platform.
top compartment
bottom compartment
platform
angle
Fig. 3.1
The platform is used to test the stability of the bus.
The angle the bus makes with the horizontal is gradually increased until the bus begins to
topple to the left.
Explain why the bus begins to topple.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) There are 30 passengers in the upper compartment of the bus and 2 passengers in the
bottom compartment of the bus.
State how this affects the stability of the bus and the reason for this.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

5
(c) A bus is travelling along a straight road. The bus and the driver have a combined mass of
16 000 kg when there are no passengers in it. The bus has 73 passengers. The average
mass of each of the passengers is 65 kg.
(i) Calculate the total mass of the bus, the driver and the 73 passengers.
mass = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) The fully loaded bus accelerates uniformly from rest to a speed of 14 m / s. The time
taken to reach a speed of 14 m / s is 20 s.
Calculate the resultant force on the bus during the acceleration.
force = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]

6
4 (a) Describe, in terms of molecules, what happens when a liquid evaporates.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Fig. 4.1 shows wet clothes drying on a washing line in an outside area.
washing line
Fig. 4.1
State two changes in the weather that help the wet clothes to dry more quickly.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

7
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows a plastic cup. The cup contains sand, an electric heater and a thermometer.
thermometer
electric
plastic heater
cup sand
Fig. 5.1
The power of the heater is 50 W. The mass of the sand in the cup is 550 g. The initial
temperature of the sand is 20 °C. The heater is switched on for 2.0 minutes. The temperature
is recorded until the temperature stops increasing. The highest temperature recorded by the
thermometer is 33 °C.
(i) Calculate the energy supplied by the heater.
energy = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) Calculate a value for the specific heat capacity of the sand, using your answer to (a)(i)
and the data in the question.
specific heat capacity = ......................................................... [3]
(iii) Explain why the specific heat capacity of sand may be different from the value calculated
in (a)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

8
(b) On a sunny day, the temperature of the sand on a beach is much higher than the temperature
of the sea.
Explain why.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Draw a labelled diagram to show the structure of a thermocouple thermometer.
[3]
[Total: 12]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

9
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows crests of a sound wave after reflection from a solid surface.
direction
of travel of
reflected
wave
solid surface
Fig. 6.1
On Fig. 6.1, draw three crests of the incident wave. [3]
(b) Tick four statements in the list below that are false for a sound wave that is audible to a
healthy human ear.
The wave is longitudinal.
The wave is transverse.
The frequency of the wave is 1 Hz.
The frequency of the wave is 1 kHz.
The frequency of the wave is 1 MHz.
The wave travels in a vacuum.
The wave could travel in aluminium.

[3]
(c) State a typical value for the speed of a sound wave in water.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

10
7 Fig. 7.1 shows red light travelling from air into a prism made of diamond. The path of the red light
is incomplete.
A
y
x
40°
ray of
red light
diamond
(a) The refractive index of diamond is 2.42.
Calculate angle x.
angle x = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Explain the term total internal reflection.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) The angle y is greater than the critical angle of diamond.
On Fig. 7.1, draw the path of the red light through and out of the prism after point A. [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

11
8 (a) (i) Describe what is meant by an electric field.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State what is meant by the direction of an electric field.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 8.1 shows a polystyrene ball covered with aluminium paint. The polystyrene ball is
suspended between two charged metal plates by an insulated thread.
insulated thread
negatively charged
metal plate
positively
charged
metal plate polystyrene ball
covered with
aluminium paint
Fig. 8.1
The ball oscillates between the two charged plates.
Explain why the ball oscillates.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) There is a current of 0.29 A in an electrical circuit.
Calculate the time taken for a charge of 15 C to flow through the electrical circuit.
time = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]

12
9 Fig. 9.1 shows a simple direct current (d.c.) electric motor. The coil rotates about the axis when
there is a current in the coil. The coil is connected to the rest of the circuit by the brushes.
axis
coil
S
N
brush
brush
+ –
Fig. 9.1
(a) (i) On Fig. 9.1, draw a pair of arrows to show which way the coil rotates. Explain the direction
you have chosen.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) On Fig. 9.1, draw an arrow to show the direction in which electrons flow through the coil.
[1]
(iii) Explain why the electrons flow in the direction you have shown in (a)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

13
(b) State any difference each of the following changes makes to the rotation of the coil in
Fig. 9.1:
(i) changing the polarity of the power supply to that shown in Fig. 9.2
– +
Fig. 9.2
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) changing the coil to the new coil shown in Fig. 9.3
original coil new coil
Fig. 9.3
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) using a stronger magnetic field.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

14
10 (a) A radioactive nucleus of carbon decays to a nucleus of nitrogen by emitting a particle.
Complete the nuclide equation and state the name of the particle.
14 C 14 N + ..... X
6 7 .....
name of particle X …………………………………………….. [3]
(b) A radiation detector in a laboratory records a reading of 10 counts / min. There are no
radioactive samples in the laboratory.
(i) Explain why the radiation detector records a reading and suggest a possible source.
explanation ....................................................
source ...............................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Carbon-14 has a half-life of 5700 years. There are atoms of carbon-14 in all living
organisms.
An archaeologist digs up some ancient wood. In the same laboratory as in (b)(i), a

sample of this ancient wood gives a reading of 20 counts / min. An equivalent sample of
living wood gives a reading of 80 counts / min. It is suggested that the age of the ancient
sample is 11 400 years.
Do a calculation to check whether this suggestion is correct.
[4]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/M/J/20

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 3 0 8 1 8 7 0 4 3 7 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CJ/CGW) 196148/2
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows an ice-hockey player moving on ice. He is preparing to hit the solid disc called a
puck.
ice-hockey player
ice
hockey stick
disc
Fig. 1.1
The disc of mass 0.16 kg is moving horizontally across the surface of the ice at a speed of 15 m / s.
(a) Calculate the magnitude of the momentum of the disc.
magnitude of momentum = ......................................................... [2]
(b) The hockey player strikes the disc with his hockey stick and the momentum of the disc
changes. The disc gains momentum of 3.0 kg m / s at 45° to the original direction of travel of
the disc, as shown in Fig. 1.2.
direction of
disc momentum gained
45°
original direction of travel
Fig. 1.2 (view from above)
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

3
(i) State the magnitude of the impulse exerted on the disc and the direction, in degrees, of
the impulse relative to the original direction of travel.
magnitude of impulse = ...............................................................
direction of impulse: ............................ ° to original direction

[1]
(ii) Determine the magnitude of the new momentum of the disc and its new direction relative
to the original direction of travel by drawing a scale diagram.
magnitude of new momentum = ...............................................................
direction of new momentum: ........................... ° to original direction

[4]
[Total: 7]
4
2 A vertical tube contains a liquid. A metal ball is held at rest by a thread just below the surface of
the liquid, as shown in Fig. 2.1.
thread
metal ball
tube
liquid
The diameter of the tube is much greater than the diameter of the ball. The ball is released and it
accelerates downwards uniformly for a short period of time.
(a) Describe what happens to the velocity of the ball in the short period of time as it accelerates
downwards uniformly.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) The ball reaches terminal velocity.
Describe and explain the motion of the ball from when it is released until it reaches terminal
velocity.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

5
(c) The metal ball has a mass of 2.1 g. It falls a distance of 0.80 m between being released and
reaching the bottom of the tube.
(i) Calculate the gravitational potential energy transferred from the ball as it falls.
gravitational potential energy transferred = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) When the ball reaches the bottom of the tube, it has a speed of 1.2 m / s. Calculate the
kinetic energy of the ball at the bottom of the tube.
kinetic energy = ......................................................... [3]
(iii) Explain why the value calculated in (c)(i) is different from that calculated in (c)(ii).
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 11]

6
3 A U-shaped tube of constant cross-sectional area contains water of density 1000 kg / m3. Both
sides of the U-tube are open to the atmosphere.
Fig. 3.1 shows that the water levels in the two sides of the tube are equal.
rubber tubing
connected to gas
supply
stopper
0.200 m
Fig. 3.1 Fig. 3.2
The atmospheric pressure is 1.00 × 105 Pa.
The left-hand side of the tube is now connected to a gas supply using a length of rubber tubing.
This causes the level of the water in the left-hand side of the tube to drop by 0.200 m, as shown in
Fig. 3.2.
(a) Calculate the pressure of the gas supply. Give your answer to 3 significant figures.
pressure = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

7
(b) Fig. 3.3 shows that the gas supply is now connected to a cylinder that contains a piston.
cylinder
open to the
rubber tubing atmosphere
connected to
gas supply
piston
Fig. 3.3
The pressure of the gas moves the piston to the right.
(i) The area of the piston in contact with the gas is 0.025 m2.
Calculate the resultant force on the piston.
resultant force = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) The pressure of the gas causes the piston to move a distance of 0.50 m to the right.
Calculate the work done by the gas from the supply on the piston.
work done = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 7]

8
4 A large test-tube contains a liquid at room temperature. An electric heater is immersed in the liquid
and is switched on. Thermal energy is supplied to the liquid by the heater. The temperature of the
liquid increases until it reaches its boiling point. The liquid then starts to change into gas.
(a) Describe, in terms of molecules and their motion, how a liquid differs from a gas.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) Describe what happens to molecules of the liquid as its temperature begins to increase.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) (i) Explain, in terms of molecules, why a supply of thermal energy is needed to change the
liquid into a gas.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The density of the liquid in the test-tube is 0.86 g / cm3. The volume of liquid in the test-
tube is 50 cm3.
The liquid reaches its boiling point. It now absorbs 18 000 J of thermal energy and all of
the liquid changes into a gas.
Calculate the specific latent heat of vaporisation of this liquid.
specific latent heat = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

9
5 A metal container is used to cook food. The metal container has thick walls. Hot cooking oil at a
temperature of 120 °C is poured into the container.
(a) The outside surface of the container gets hot. Some thermal energy passes through the metal
because vibrating atoms in the metal collide with neighbouring atoms and transfer energy to
them.
Explain how the rest of the thermal energy is conducted through the metal container to the
outside surface by another process.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The outside surface of the container is brightly polished and shiny.
Explain how this reduces the power that needs to be supplied to keep the oil at the correct
temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) The metal container is spherical. The spherical container has a smaller surface area than a
long, thin container of the same volume.
Explain the advantage of using a spherical container.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

10
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a shallow tank viewed from above. The depth of the water is different in the two
parts of the tank. Fig. 6.1 shows the crests and the troughs of a wave that pass from left to right.
boundary
45°
Key
trough
crest
33°
2.6 cm
As the wave passes from one side to the other, the direction of the wavefronts changes.
(a) Explain why the direction of the wavefronts changes in the way shown in Fig. 6.1.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The speed of the wave in the left-hand part of the tank is 0.39 m / s.
(i) Using information from Fig. 6.1, determine the frequency of the wave.
frequency = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

11
(ii) Determine the speed of the wave in the right-hand side of the tank.
speed = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]

12
7 (a) A permanent magnet is made from only one material.
Underline the material from which it is possible to make a permanent magnet. [1]
aluminium copper soft iron mercury plastic steel uranium
(b) An electron source produces a narrow beam of electrons that all travel at the same speed.
The electron source is placed in a vacuum and the beam of electrons travels vertically
downwards. Fig. 7.1 shows the beam of electrons before it passes between the N-pole and
the S-pole of a magnet.
electron source
beam of electrons
N-pole S-pole
Fig. 7.1
(i) Describe what is meant by the direction of a magnetic field. State the direction of the
magnetic field between the two poles in Fig. 7.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

13
(ii) Describe and explain what happens to the beam of electrons in the magnetic field
between the poles of the magnet in Fig. 7.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(c) A beam consists of α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays.
Explain how a uniform magnetic field may be used to separate the α-particles, the β-particles
and the γ-rays.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]

14
8 (a) Explain what is meant by electromotive force (e.m.f.).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) An electric heater contains two heating elements R1 and R2. An electric motor operates a fan.
The fan blows cool air over the heating elements.
Fig. 8.1 shows the circuit.
S1 S2 S3
240 V mains
supply M
R1 R2
Fig. 8.1
The heater is powered by a mains supply of e.m.f. 240 V.
Switches S1 and S2 are closed. Heating element R1 gets hot. The resistance of R1 is 30 Ω.
(i) Calculate the current in heating element R1.
current = ......................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the power produced in heating element R1.
power = ......................................................... [2]
(iii) The resistance of heating element R2 is 60 Ω.
Switches S1, S2 and S3 are closed.
1. State and explain how the current in R2 compares with the current in R1.
.....................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

15
2. The current in the motor is 0.10 A. The cable from the electric heater to the plug for
the mains socket is safe when the current in it is less than 20 A.
Suggest and explain a suitable fuse rating for this circuit.
.....................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................
.....................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]

16
9 (a) (i) Describe what is observed during total internal reflection.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State two conditions required for light to be totally internally reflected.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Describe and explain the action of optical fibres in communication technology. You may draw
a diagram in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

17
10 A radiation detector is placed on the bench in a laboratory. It detects a background count rate of
40 counts / minute.
(a) State what is meant by background radiation. Suggest one source for it.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) A sample containing atoms of the radioactive isotope polonium-208 is removed from a
lead container and brought close to the detector. The average count rate increases to
890 counts / minute.
When two sheets of paper are inserted between the sample and the detector, the average
count rate returns to 40 counts / minute.
Polonium-208 is represented by the symbol 208

84Po. It decays to an isotope of lead (Pb).
(i) Deduce the type of radiation emitted by polonium-208. Explain your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Write down the nuclide equation for the decay of polonium-208.
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

18
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

19
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

20
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2020 0625/41/O/N/20

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 0 8 0 7 6 7 8 9 1 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CJ/CGW) 196149/3
2
1 A sky-diver jumps out of a hot-air balloon, which is 4000 m above the ground. At time = 30 s, she
opens her parachute.
Fig. 1.1 is the speed-time graph of her fall.
60
speed
m/s
40
20
0
0 10 20 30 40 50
4.0
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) (i) Label with the letter X the point on the graph where the sky-diver opens her parachute.
[1]
(ii) Label with the letters Y and Z the two parts of the graph where the sky-diver falls at
terminal velocity. [1]
(b) Describe, in terms of the forces acting on the sky-diver, her motion between leaving the
balloon and opening her parachute.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) Calculate the average speed of the sky-diver in the first 4.0 s of her fall.
average speed = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/O/N/20
3
2 (a) Define the moment of a force about a point.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows a uniform rod of wood suspended from a pivot.
0.25 m
pivot
34°
centre of mass
0.75 m
rod of wood
W
F
The rod is held stationary by a horizontal force F acting as shown.

The mass of the rod is 0.080 kg.
Calculate:
(i) the weight W of the rod
weight = .......................................................... [1]
(ii) the moment of W about the pivot
moment = .......................................................... [2]
(iii) the moment of F about the pivot
moment = .......................................................... [1]
(iv) the force F.
force = .......................................................... [2]

4
(c) The angle between the rod and the vertical is increased.
State whether the force F needed to hold the rod stationary must be increased, decreased or
stay the same.
Explain your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/O/N/20

5
3 The kinetic energy of air passing through a wind turbine every minute is 720 000 J. The electrical
output of the turbine is 9.0 A at a potential difference (p.d.) of 240 V.
Calculate the efficiency (%) of the wind turbine.
efficiency = ...................................................... % [5]

6
4 Fig. 4.1 shows a thermometer.
wire of V wire of
material A material A
ice
cubes
wire of
material B
water at 0 °C water at 100 °C
Fig. 4.1
The voltmeter reading is 5.4 mV.
(a) State the name of this type of thermometer.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 4.2 shows the same thermometer used to measure the temperature of liquid X.
liquid X
water at 20 °C
Fig. 4.2
With the setup in Fig. 4.2, the voltmeter reading is 1.7 mV.
Calculate the temperature of liquid X measured by the thermometer.
temperature = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/O/N/20

7
(c) Suggest an application for which this type of thermometer is more suitable than a liquid-in-
glass thermometer.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 4]

8
5 (a) (i) Define specific latent heat.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain the melting of a solid in terms of molecules and energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) An electrical heater is used to heat a liquid to its boiling point. Fig. 5.1 shows the apparatus.
connecting
liquid
wires
heater element container
balance 3800 g
Fig. 5.1
When the liquid is boiling, the heater supplies 1.26 MJ of thermal energy. The mass reading
shown on the balance decreases from 3800 g to 2300 g.
Calculate the specific latent heat of vaporisation of the liquid.
specific latent heat = ......................................................... [3]
(c) State and explain a precaution to improve the accuracy of the value of specific latent heat
calculated in (b).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/O/N/20
9
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a transverse wave produced in a string.
string
Fig. 6.1 (full size)
(a) On Fig. 6.1:
(i) draw labelled lines to show
1. the amplitude of the wave
2. the wavelength of the wave

[2]
(ii) label a trough with the letter T. [1]
(b) A person vibrates one end of the string vertically to produce the wave. He makes 15 complete
oscillations in 60 s.
Show that the speed of the wave is 2.0 cm / s.
[3]
(c) State the difference between transverse waves and longitudinal waves. Use your ideas about
the direction of oscillations.
transverse waves ......................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
longitudinal waves ....................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]

10
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a ray of light passing through an optical fibre.
i Q
Fig. 7.1
The optical fibre is made of glass that has a refractive index of 1.4.
(a) (i) No light refracts from the fibre at points P and Q.
State the name of the process that occurs at P and Q.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Calculate the minimum value of angle i for there to be no refraction at point P.
angle = .......................................................... [2]
(b) State and explain the use of optical fibres in medicine.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) The ray of light shown in Fig. 7.1 is monochromatic light from a laser.
State what is meant by monochromatic light. Use one of the following quantities in your answer.
amplitude brightness frequency refractive index speed
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/O/N/20

11
8 (a) State and explain why electrical sockets and plugs used outside in a garden need to be
different from those that can be used safely in a room inside a house.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) State and explain why fuses and circuit breakers are installed in electrical circuits connected
to the mains supply.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 4]

12
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows a bar magnet and four plotting compasses A, B, C and D.
C A
bar magnet
Fig. 9.1
On Fig. 9.1:
(i) draw an arrow on each of the three plotting compasses B, C and D to show the direction
of the magnetic field [2]
(ii) label the magnetic poles of the bar magnet N and S. [1]
(b) Describe one method for demagnetising a bar magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/O/N/20

13
(c) Fig. 9.2 represents a current in a wire. The current is into the plane of the paper.
(i) Draw the pattern of the magnetic field produced around the wire. Show clearly the
direction of the magnetic field.
Fig. 9.2
[2]
(ii) The direction of the current in the wire is reversed. The magnitude of the current is
unchanged.
State the effect that reversing the current has on the magnetic field produced.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

14
10 Fig. 10.1 shows an incomplete electrical circuit.
2.0 Ω C D
A B 6.0 Ω
E F
4.0 Ω
Fig. 10.1
(a) (i) A student completes the circuit and measures the current in the 6.0 Ω resistor.
On Fig. 10.1, draw an ammeter symbol in one gap and straight lines to indicate wires in
the other gaps to show how the student should do this. [1]
(ii) A voltmeter is connected to measure the potential difference (p.d.) across the 4.0 Ω
resistor.
On Fig. 10.1, draw a voltmeter symbol connected in the correct position. [2]
(iii) With the circuit completed, the current in the 2.0 Ω resistor is 2.5 A.
Calculate the current in the 6.0 Ω resistor.
current = ......................................................... [4]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/O/N/20

15
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows the same electrical circuit with an alternating current (a.c.) power supply and
a wire in the gap AB.
2.0 Ω C D
A B 6.0 Ω
E F
4.0 Ω
Fig. 10.2
On Fig. 10.2, draw a diode symbol in one gap and a straight line to indicate a wire in the other
gap so that there is a current from right to left in the 4.0 Ω resistor and an alternating current
in the 2.0 Ω resistor. [2]
[Total: 9]

16
11 (a) State two differences between nuclear fission and nuclear fusion.
1 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2 ................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) Radioactive tracers emitting γ-rays can be used in medicine. The half-life of the source of
these γ-rays is 6 hours.
(i) Explain why a source of γ-rays used in this way should not have a half-life shorter or
longer than about 6 hours.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Technetium-99 is a source of γ-rays often used as a radioactive tracer. It is produced

from molybdenum-99 which emits β-particles. The symbol for technetium is Tc and the
symbol for molybdenum is Mo.
Complete the nuclide equation for this decay.
99
..... .....
42 Mo ..... Tc + ..... β
[3]
(iii) Technetium-99 is a radioactive nuclide.
State another use of radioactive nuclides in medicine.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/42/O/N/20

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 0 1 7 2 8 4 2 2 4 9 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (CJ/CGW) 196162/3
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 shows a trolley travelling down a ramp.
tape
trolley
P ramp
Fig. 1.1
The trolley has a piece of paper tape attached to it. The tape passes through a machine
which makes a dot on the tape every 0.02 s.
Fig. 1.2 shows a section of the tape.
Fig. 1.2
(i) State how the dots on the tape show that the trolley was moving with constant speed.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) When the trolley reaches the point P, the ramp is tilted so that the angle x is greater.
Describe and explain the change in motion of the trolley.
description .........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20

3
(b) Another trolley is released from the top of the ramp.
Fig. 1.3 shows the speed–time graph for this trolley.
1.5
speed
m/s
1.0
0.5
0
0 0.5 1.0 1.5
time / s
Fig. 1.3
Using Fig. 1.3, calculate the distance travelled by the trolley in the first 0.5 s.
distance = ......................................................... [2]

4
(c) Fig. 1.4 shows a metal ball at rest in a tube of liquid.
metal ball
X
liquid
tube
Fig. 1.4
The ball is released and reaches terminal velocity at point X.
Explain the motion of the ball as it falls from rest until it reaches point X.
Use ideas of force and acceleration in your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20

5
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a cliff edge with water below it.
ball
cliff
115 m
water
Fig. 2.1
A ball falls over the edge of the cliff. The mass of the ball is 160 g. The height of the cliff is 115 m.
(a) Calculate the vertical speed of the ball as it hits the water. Air resistance can be ignored.
speed = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Calculate the vertical momentum of the ball as it hits the water.
momentum = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 5]

6
3 (a) (i) Speed is a scalar quantity.
State one other scalar quantity.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Velocity is a vector quantity.
State one other vector quantity.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a model car travelling at constant speed on a flat circular track.
car
circular
track
Fig. 3.1
The speed of the car is 0.30 m / s. In one complete revolution around the track, the car travels
3.9 m.
(i) Calculate the time taken for the car to complete one revolution around the track.
time = .......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20

7
(ii) On Fig. 3.1, draw and label with the letter F an arrow to show the resultant force acting
on the car. [1]
(iii) The speed of the car increases and at point P on Fig. 3.2 the car does not stay on the
track.
Fig. 3.2
1. Suggest, in terms of the force acting on the car, why the car does not stay on the track
at point P.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
2. On Fig. 3.2, draw and label an arrow with the letter S to show the direction of motion of
the car as it leaves the track at point P. [1]
[Total: 7]

8
4 In Fig. 4.1, the circles represent molecules in different states of matter.
A B C
Fig. 4.1
(a) Identify the states A, B and C.
A ………………………………………………………..
B ………………………………………………………..
C ………………………………………………………..
[2]
(b) Explain, in terms of forces between molecules, why gases expand more than liquids when
they have the same rise in temperature. Assume that the pressure remains constant.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) Fig. 4.2 shows a cylinder and piston.
cylinder
piston
gas
Fig. 4.2
The volume of gas in the cylinder is 3400 cm3. The pressure of the gas in the cylinder is
0.90 × 105 Pa.
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20

9
(i) The piston is moved to the left and fixed in a new position. The pressure of the gas in
the cylinder increases to 2.5 × 105 Pa. Assume that the temperature of the gas does not
change.
Calculate the new volume of the gas.
volume = .......................................................... [3]
(ii) The gas in the cylinder is now heated. The piston remains fixed in the same position as
in (c)(i).
State and explain, in terms of molecules, any change in the pressure of the gas.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 10]

10
5 Fig. 5.1 shows two metal plates A and B with a radiant heater placed midway between them.
shiny plate dull black plate
wax wax
cork cork
A B
radiant heater
Fig. 5.1
Metal plate A is shiny. Metal plate B is dull black. A piece of cork is attached to each plate using
wax. The wax is a solid at room temperature and has a melting point of 37 °C.
(a) State and explain what happens to the pieces of cork a few minutes after the heater is
switched on.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) Give the name of the method of transfer of thermal energy in solid metals.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20

11
6 (a) Sound waves consist of compressions and rarefactions.
Explain the terms compression and rarefaction. Give your explanation in terms of the spacing
of molecules and the pressure for sound waves in air.
compression .............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
rarefaction .................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A musical instrument emits a sound with a frequency of 4.4 kHz. The speed of sound in air is
340 m / s.
(i) Calculate the wavelength of the sound.
wavelength = .......................................................... [3]
(ii) The frequency of the sound emitted by the instrument is changed to 5.1 kHz and the
amplitude of the sound is increased.
Without calculation, state what happens to
1. the speed of the sound ..................................................................................................
2. the wavelength of the sound .........................................................................................

[2]
[Total: 8]

12
7 (a) State two uses for infrared radiation.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) X-rays are used in hospitals to help treat patients.
Suggest and explain three precautions for the safe use of X-rays.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
3. ...............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) (i) State the speed in a vacuum of
1. microwaves ............................................................................................................. [1]
2. X-rays .................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) State a possible frequency for an ultrasound wave.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20

13
8 (a) (i) Fig. 8.1 shows an electrical circuit. The resistor has a resistance of 4.0 Ω. The reading on
the voltmeter is 3.0 V.
Fig. 8.1
Calculate the current in the resistor.
current = .......................................................... [2]
(ii) Fig. 8.2 shows the same circuit with one component reversed.
Fig. 8.2
State the reading on the voltmeter and explain your answer.
reading = ...............................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[2]

14
(b) Fig. 8.3 shows the symbol for a logic gate.
X
Z
Y
Fig. 8.3
The truth table for this logic gate is shown in Table 8.1.
Table 8.1
input X input Y output Z

0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1
State the name of this logic gate. …………………………………………….. [1]
(c) (i) A student designs the circuit shown in Fig. 8.4.
A C
B
E
Fig. 8.4
Complete the truth table for this circuit in Table 8.2.
Table 8.2
A B C D E
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
[3]
(ii) A single logic gate can be used to produce output E in Fig. 8.4 with the inputs A and B
shown in Table 8.2.
State the name of this logic gate. ………………………………………. [1]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20
15
9 (a) Electrical power is produced in a power station by an alternating current (a.c.) generator.
The output of the generator has a voltage of 22 000 V. The electrical power is transmitted at a
voltage of 400 000 V.
Explain why electrical power is transmitted at a voltage of 400 000 V and not 22 000 V.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) A computer contains a transformer.
The input voltage to the transformer is 240 V. The output voltage from the transformer is 20 V
and the output current is 2.3 A.
The efficiency of the transformer is 90%.
Calculate the input current to the transformer.
current = .......................................................... [5]
[Total: 8]

16
10 Fig. 10.1 shows a relay.
circuit
B
contacts pivot
M
soft-iron
armature
circuit
A
Fig. 10.1
(a) The switch in circuit A is closed. Describe how this operates the motor in circuit B.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) The switch in circuit A is opened. The soft-iron armature is replaced with a steel armature.
The switch in circuit A is closed.
Explain what happens when the switch in circuit A is then opened.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20

17
11 (a) Fig. 11.1 shows a beam of α-particles, β-particles and γ-rays directed between two metal
plates P and Q.
P + + + + + + + +
beam of
α-particles, β-particles
and γ-rays
Q – – – – – – – –
Fig. 11.1
The metal plates are parallel and there is a large potential difference (p.d.) between them.
Plate P is positive and plate Q is negative.
On Fig. 11.1, draw the paths of each of the radiations between the plates and after leaving
the plates.
Label the paths α, β and γ. [5]
(b) State and explain one practical application of γ-rays.
application ................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2020 0625/43/O/N/20

Cambridge IGCSE®
PHYSICS 0625/04
*0123456789*
Paper 4 Theory (Extended) For examination from 2020

SPECIMEN PAPER
1 hour 15 minutes
Candidates answer on the question paper.
No additional materials are required.
You may use an HB pencil for any diagrams, graphs or rough working.


2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows the speed-time graph for a car travelling along a straight road.
The graph shows how the speed of the car changes as the car passes through a small town.
35
D
30
speed
m/s
A
25
enters leaves
20 town town
here here
15
B C
10
0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70
time / s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Calculate the distance between the start of the town and the end of the town.
distance = [3]
© UCLES 2017 0625/04/SP/20

3
(b) Calculate the acceleration of the car between C and D.
acceleration = [3]
(c) State how the graph shows that the deceleration of the car has the same numerical value as
its acceleration.
[1]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2017 0625/04/SP/20 [Turn over

4
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a conveyor belt transporting a package to a raised platform. The belt is driven by a
motor.
conveyor belt
package
motor
Fig. 2.1
(a) The mass of the package is 36 kg.
Calculate the increase in the gravitational potential energy (g.p.e.) of the package when it is
raised through a vertical height of 2.4 m.
increase in g.p.e. = [2]
(b) The package is raised through the vertical height of 2.4 m in 4.4 s.
Calculate the power needed to raise the package.
power = [2]
(c) The electrical power supplied to the motor is much greater than the answer to (b).
Explain how the principle of conservation of energy applies to this system.
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/04/SP/20

5
(d) Assume that the power available to raise packages is constant. A package of mass greater
than 36 kg is raised through the same height.
Suggest and explain the effect of this increase in mass on the operation of the conveyer belt.
[3]
[Total: 9]

6
3 The engine of an unpowered toy train is rolling at a constant speed on a level track, as shown in
Fig. 3.1. The engine collides with a stationary toy truck, and joins with it.
moving engine
stationary truck
track
Fig. 3.1
Before the collision, the toy engine is travelling at 0.32 m / s. The mass of the engine is 0.50 kg.
(a) Calculate the momentum of the toy engine before the collision.
momentum = [2]
(b) The mass of the truck is 0.30 kg.
Using the principle of conservation of momentum, calculate the speed of the joined engine
and truck immediately after the collision.
speed = [3]
[Total: 5]
© UCLES 2017 0625/04/SP/20

8
4 A solar panel is mounted on the roof of a house. Fig. 4.1 shows a section through part of the
solar panel.
sunlight
trapped
air copper pipe,
painted black
water
glass sheet
insulating metal backing sheet,

material painted black
Fig. 4.1
A pump makes water flow through the copper pipes. The water is heated by passing through the
solar panel.
(a) Select and explain three features of the solar panel that maximise the final temperature of
the water.
[4]
© UCLES 2017 0625/04/SP/20

9
(b) During one day, 250 kg of water is pumped through the solar panel. The temperature of this
water rises from 16 °C to 38 °C.
The water absorbs 25 % of the energy incident on the solar panel. The specific heat capacity
of water is 4200 J / (kg °C).
Calculate the energy incident on the solar panel during that day.
energy = [4]
(c) The solar panel in Fig. 4.1 is designed to heat water.
A person is deciding whether to install solar panels on her house.
List and explain three pieces of information she needs to consider in order to make her
decision.
[4]
(d) The Sun releases energy as a result of nuclear fusion.
State the meaning of nuclear fusion.
[2]
[Total: 14]

10
5 Fig. 5.1 shows a gas contained in a cylinder enclosed by a piston.
piston pressure gauge
gas cylinder
100 cm
Fig. 5.1
At first, the length of cylinder containing the gas is 100 cm. The pressure of the gas, shown by the
pressure gauge, is 300 kPa. The area of cross-section of the cylinder is 0.12 m2.
(a) (i) Describe the motion of the molecules of the gas.
[1]
(ii) Use the idea of momentum to explain how the molecules exert a force on the walls of the
cylinder.
[2]
© UCLES 2017 0625/04/SP/20

11
(b) The piston is moved so that the new length of cylinder occupied by the gas is 40 cm. The
temperature of the gas is unchanged.
(i) Calculate the new pressure of the gas.
pressure = [2]
(ii) Explain, in terms of the behaviour of the molecules, why the pressure has changed.
[2]
[Total: 7]

12
6 Fig. 6.1 shows a scale drawing of plane wavefronts approaching a gap in a barrier.
direction of wave travel
barrier
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, draw the pattern of the wavefronts after the wave has passed through the gap.
[2]
(b) The wave approaching the barrier has a wavelength of 2.5 cm and a speed of 20 cm / s.
frequency = [2]
(c) State what happens, if anything, to the frequency of the wave as it passes through the gap.
[1]
© UCLES 2017 0625/04/SP/20

13
(d) Explain, in terms of diffraction, why a car radio may pick up low frequency radio signals but
not pick up high frequency radio signals when the car is travelling behind a hill.
[2]
[Total: 7]

14
7 The circuit of Fig. 7.1 includes an immersion heater and a 6.0 V battery.
6.0 V
X
A
heater
Fig. 7.1
(a) State the name and purpose of component X.
name
purpose
[1]
(b) The heater is designed to work from a 3.6 V supply. It has a power rating of 4.5 W at this
voltage.
By considering the current in the heater, calculate the resistance of component X when there
is the correct potential difference across the heater.
resistance = [5]
(c) Some time after the heater is switched on, the ammeter reading is seen to have decreased.
Suggest why this happens.
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2017 0625/04/SP/20

15
8 Fig. 8.1 is a schematic diagram of an electronic circuit controlling a lamp.
temperature
sensor
relay lamp
B
A
light
sensor
Fig. 8.1
The output of the temperature sensor is high (logic 1) when it detects raised temperatures. The
output of the light sensor is high (logic 1) when it detects raised light levels.
The lamp is lit when the input to the relay is high (logic 1).
(a) Complete the truth table by giving the outputs of A and B.
output of output of
output of A output of B
light sensor temperature sensor
0 0
0 1
1 0
1 1
[2]
(b) State the conditions under which the lamp is lit.
[1]
(c) Suggest why B is connected to a relay, rather than directly to the lamp.
[2]
[Total: 5]

16
9 A plastic rod is rubbed with a cloth and becomes positively charged. After charging, the rod is
held close to the suspended table-tennis ball shown in Fig. 9.1. The table-tennis ball is covered
with metal paint and is uncharged.
nylon thread
light
table-tennis ball
covered with metal
paint
positively
charged rod
Fig. 9.1
(a) Describe what happens to the charges in the metal paint on the ball as the positively charged
rod is brought close to the ball.
[1]
(b) The ball is attracted towards the charged rod.
Explain why this happens, given that the ball is uncharged.
[2]
(c) State the unit in which electric charge is measured.
[1]
[Total: 4]
© UCLES 2017 0625/04/SP/20

17
10 Emissions from a radioactive source pass through a hole in a lead screen and into a magnetic
field, as shown in Fig. 10.1. The experiment is carried out in a vacuum.
radioactive A magnetic field

source into paper
lead
screen
3 cm
Fig. 10.1
Radiation detectors are placed at A, B and C. They give the following readings:
A B C
32 counts / min 543 counts / min 396 counts / min
The radioactive source is then completely removed, and the readings become:
A B C
33 counts / min 30 counts / min 31 counts / min
From the data given for positions A, B and C, deduce the type of emissions coming from the
radioactive source. Explain your reasoning.
[7]
[Total: 7]

18
11 In Geiger and Marsden’s α-particle scattering experiment, α-particles were directed at a very thin
gold foil.
Fig. 11.1 shows five of the nuclei of the atoms in one layer in the gold foil. Also shown are the
paths of three α-particles directed at the foil.
Fig. 11.1
(a) On Fig.11.1, complete the paths of the three α-particles. [3]
(b) (i) State the result of the experiment that shows that an atom consists of a very tiny,
charged core, containing almost all the mass of the atom.
[1]
(ii) State the sign of the charge on this core. ...................................................................... [1]
(iii) State what occupies the space between these charged cores.
[1]
(c) The nuclide notation for an α-particle is 4

2 α.
State the number of protons and neutrons in an α-particle
protons =
neutrons = [1]
[Total: 7]
Cambridge Assessment International Education is part of the Cambridge Assessment Group. Cambridge Assessment is the brand name of University of
Cambridge Local Examinations Syndicate (UCLES), which is itself a department of the University of Cambridge.
© UCLES 2017 0625/04/SP/20

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 8 3 2 4 5 0 9 7 6 7 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes
[No additional materials are needed.]
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
This document has 16 pages. Any blank pages are indicated.
DC (CJ/CGW) 203605/2
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 shows a piece of glass of thickness 2.0 cm and area 0.15 m2.
The density of the glass is 2.6 × 103 kg / m3.
area 0.15 m2
thickness 2.0 cm
Calculate the weight of the piece of glass.
weight = ..................................................... [3]
(b) The piece of glass shown in Fig. 1.1 is used as the vertical viewing window of an aquarium.
The atmospheric pressure outside the aquarium is 1.0 × 105 Pa. The average pressure on
the inside of the aquarium window is 1.3 × 105 Pa.
Calculate the resultant force acting on the window due to these pressures and state the
direction in which it acts.
force = ...........................................................
direction of force ..............................................................

[4]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/F/M/21

3
(c) Fig. 1.2 shows a vacuum pump connected to the top of a vertical tube with its lower end
immersed in a tank of liquid. The pump reduces the pressure above the column to zero and
the pressure at point X is 9.6 × 104 Pa.
vacuum
pump
point X
12 m
liquid
density = ..................................................... [3]
[Total: 10]

4
2 (a) (i) State what is meant by the moment of a force about a point.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Fig. 2.1 shows a large crane on a construction site lifting a block of mass 14 000 kg.
operator’s cabin 20 m
A B
counterweight
block
Fig. 2.1
Calculate the moment about A due to the 14 000 kg block suspended from B.
moment = ..................................................... [2]
(b) (i) Speed is a scalar quantity and velocity is a vector quantity. State the difference between
a scalar quantity and a vector quantity.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Write down one other scalar quantity and one other vector quantity.
scalar quantity ...................................................................................................................
vector quantity ...................................................................................................................

[2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/F/M/21

5
(c) Fig. 2.2 shows two forces acting on an object.
60° 30 N
20 N
Draw a scale diagram to determine the resultant force acting on the object. State the scale
you use.
scale ..............................................................
magnitude of resultant force = ...........................................................
direction of resultant relative to the direction of the 20 N force = ...........................................................

[4]
[Total: 11]
6
3 A power station burns waste materials from farm crops to generate electricity.
(a) State and explain whether this process is renewable.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(b) The power station uses some of its waste thermal energy to heat water for houses in a nearby
town.
State one problem of using waste energy in this way if the power station is far from the town.
...................................................................................................................................................
Suggest a way of reducing this problem.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[2]
(c) State two environmental consequences of burning coal to generate electricity.
consequence 1. ........................................................................................................................
consequence 2. ........................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/F/M/21

7
4 (a) In terms of the momentum of molecules, explain how a gas exerts pressure on the walls of its
container.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(b) A fixed mass of gas of volume V1 is at a pressure p1. It is compressed to a volume V2.
(i) Complete the equation for the final pressure p2 of the gas when the gas is compressed
at constant temperature.
p2 =
[2]
(ii) State and explain how the final pressure compares with p2 when the temperature of the
gas increases during compression.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 9]

8
5 (a) State the name of the reflection of a sound wave or ultrasound wave.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 5.1 shows an ultrasound wave being used to scan an internal organ of a human body.
ultrasound transmitter
and receiver
internal organ
ultrasound
wave
Fig. 5.1
The ultrasound wave has a frequency of 2.0 MHz and passes through human tissue at a
speed of 1500 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of the ultrasound wave in human tissue.
wavelength = ..................................................... [3]
(c) Fig. 5.2 shows crests of a wave from a point source S approaching a straight barrier.
straight barrier
S
Fig. 5.2
(i) On Fig. 5.2, indicate and label one wavelength.
(ii) On Fig. 5.2, draw three crests of the wave reflected from the barrier.
[3]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/F/M/21
9
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 is a full scale diagram showing a converging lens, the two principal focuses F1 and F2
and an object PO.
F1 P F2
Fig. 6.1
On Fig. 6.1, draw two rays from point O of the object to determine the position of the image.
Label the image IJ. Measure the length of the image.
image length = ...........................................................

[3]
(b) Ring three descriptions of the image.
diminished magnified real same size
same way up as object upside down compared to object virtual [3]

10
(c) Fig. 6.2 shows three rays of green light passing through glass blocks.
ray of green light
glass blocks
Fig. 6.2
Three rays of red light approach the glass blocks on the same paths as the rays of green
light.
On Fig. 6.2, draw the paths of these rays of red light to the right of the glass blocks. [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/F/M/21

11
7 Fig. 7.1 shows a horizontal conducting wire XY between two opposite magnetic poles. Wire XY
forms a circuit with an ammeter.
wire
N X
S
A
Fig. 7.1
(a) Explain why the reading on the ammeter is zero when the wire XY is not moving.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The wire XY is moved and there is a deflection on the ammeter that indicates there is a
current in the wire from X to Y.
On Table 7.1, tick one box to indicate the direction of the movement of the wire XY and
explain your answer.
Table 7.1
into page out of page to the left to the right to the bottom to the top of
of the page the page
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
(c) State what is observed on the ammeter when the wire XY is moved
(i) in the opposite direction to part (b) ............................................................................... [1]
(ii) in the same direction as part (b) but at a greater speed ............................................... [1]
[Total: 6]

12
8 (a) Define electromotive force (e.m.f.).
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 8.1 shows a source E of e.m.f. 60 V in a circuit.
10 Ω
Fig. 8.1
The heater H has a resistance of 22.5 Ω and the potential difference (p.d.) across it is 45 V.
Calculate:
(i) the power of the heater
power = ..................................................... [3]
(ii) the p.d. across resistor X
p.d. = ..................................................... [2]
(iii) the current in the 10 Ω resistor.
current = ..................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/F/M/21

13
9 (a) Write down the truth table for an OR gate.
[2]
(b) Draw the symbol for a NOR gate.
[1]
(c) Fig. 9.1 shows a digital circuit designed to produce the values shown in Table 9.1 for the
output S from the two inputs P and Q.
P gate X
S
Q R
Fig. 9.1
(i) Table 9.1 is the truth table for the circuit shown in Fig. 9.1.
Table 9.1
P Q R S
0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
Complete the column for point R in Table 9.1. [1]
(ii) State which type of gate is used for gate X. Explain your answer.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 7]
14
10 (a) State the proton number, nucleon number and the value of the charge on an α-particle.
proton number ..........................................................................................................................
nucleon number ........................................................................................................................
charge .......................................................................................................................................
[3]
(b) A nucleus of strontium-90 consists of 38 protons and 52 neutrons. Strontium-90 is radioactive

and decays by β-emission to an isotope of yttrium. The symbol for strontium is Sr and the
symbol for yttrium is Y. Write down the nuclide equation of this decay.
[3]
(c) The half-life of radon-220 is 56 s. A sample of radon-220 is in a container. After 112 s the mass
of radon-220 is 9.2 mg.
Calculate the mass of the original sample.
mass = ..................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/F/M/21

16
BLANK PAGE
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/F/M/21

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 4 2 9 1 3 2 6 1 6 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/41
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (ST/JG) 198541/2
2
1 A skydiver of mass 76 kg is falling vertically in still air. At time t = 0, the skydiver opens his
parachute.
Fig. 1.1 is the speed–time graph for the skydiver from t = 0.
60
speed
m/s
40
20
0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6
t/s
Fig. 1.1
(a) Using Fig. 1.1, determine:
(i) the deceleration of the skydiver immediately after the parachute opens
deceleration = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) the force due to air resistance acting on the skydiver immediately after the parachute
opens.
force = ......................................................... [3]
(b) Explain, in terms of the forces acting on the skydiver, his motion between t = 0 and t = 6.0 s.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Explain why opening the parachute cannot reduce the speed of the skydiver to zero.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/M/J/21
3
2 Fig. 2.1 shows a wooden trolley of mass 1.2 kg at rest on the rough surface of a bench.
trolley
ball
Fig. 2.1
A ball of mass 0.52 g travels horizontally towards the trolley. The ball embeds itself in the wood of
the trolley. The trolley moves with an initial speed of 0.065 m / s.
(a) Calculate:
(i) the impulse exerted on the trolley
impulse = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) the speed of the ball as it hits the trolley.
speed = ......................................................... [2]
(b) As the trolley moves across the rough surface, it slows down and stops.
Explain, in terms of the work done, the energy change that takes place as the trolley slows
down.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 7]

4
3 (a) Explain, in terms of molecules, why liquids are very difficult to compress.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 3.1 shows a device that uses liquid pressure to lift heavy boxes.
boxes
cylinder
piston
moving oil
oil
pump
Fig. 3.1
The boxes are lifted by pumping oil into the cylinder.
The force upwards on the piston due to the oil, and the force downwards on the piston due to
the air above the piston, combine to produce a constant force of 8800 N.
The pressure of the air is 1.0 × 105 Pa and the cross-sectional area of the bottom surface of
the piston is 0.016 m2.
(i) Calculate the pressure of the oil at the bottom surface of the piston.
pressure = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/M/J/21

5
(ii) As the boxes are lifted, the depth of the oil increases.
Explain why the pump must exert an increasing pressure on the oil as the depth of the oil
increases.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(iii) Suggest one reason why the force of 8800 N in (b) cannot lift boxes of weight 8800 N.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]

6
4 An aluminium saucepan with a plastic handle contains cold water.
Fig. 4.1 shows the saucepan on a hotplate.
aluminium saucepan
plastic handle
water
hotplate
Fig. 4.1
(a) State why the pan is made from aluminium but the handle is made from plastic.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) The hotplate is switched on and, as the temperature of the water increases, the internal
energy of the water increases.
(i) State, in terms of molecules, what is meant by an increase in internal energy.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain, in terms of the atomic lattice and electrons, how thermal energy is transferred
through the aluminium.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(iii) Eventually, the water reaches boiling point. Thermal energy from the hotplate is still
being transferred to the water.
Explain, in terms of molecules, the effect of this thermal energy on the water.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/M/J/21
7
(iv) The mass of the water decreases by 0.11 kg in 300 s. The specific latent heat of
vaporisation of water is 2.3 × 106 J / kg.
Calculate the rate at which the water gains thermal energy.
rate of gain of energy = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 11]

8
5 Fig. 5.1 shows the structure of a liquid-in-glass thermometer.
bulb glass
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
°C
liquid
Fig. 5.1
The bulb of the thermometer is placed into a beaker of warm water. As the liquid expands, it
moves along the tube.
(a) Explain, in terms of molecules, why a liquid expands when heated.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Explain, in terms of molecules, why a liquid expands more than a solid when heated.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) A second thermometer has a larger bulb that contains more of the same liquid than the
thermometer shown in Fig. 5.1. It has a different scale. In every other way, it is identical.
(i) Explain how the sensitivity of the second thermometer compares with the sensitivity of
the thermometer in Fig. 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) Explain how the range of the second thermometer compares with the range of the
thermometer in Fig. 5.1.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/M/J/21

9
(d) (i) State one everyday problem that is a result of thermal expansion.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Suggest and explain one way of solving this problem.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]

10
6 Fig. 6.1 is a full-scale diagram that represents a sound wave travelling in air.
direction of travel
Fig. 6.1
(a) On Fig. 6.1, mark two points, each at the centre of a different compression. Label both of the
points C. [1]
(b) The speed of sound in air is 330 m / s.
Measure the diagram and determine the frequency of the sound.
frequency = ......................................................... [3]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/M/J/21

11
(c) The wave reaches a barrier. Fig. 6.2 shows the wave passing through a gap in the barrier.
barrier
direction of travel
Fig. 6.2
The frequency of the wave is increased to a value many times greater than the value obtained
in (b).
Describe and explain two ways in which a diagram representing the wave with the greater
frequency differs from Fig. 6.2.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 7]

12
7 Fig. 7.1 represents an alternating current (a.c.) generator.
N direction of
rotation
X
Y
Fig. 7.1
(a) A student rotates the handle H, as shown in Fig. 7.1.
(i) On Fig. 7.2, sketch a graph to show how the electromotive force (e.m.f.) between
terminals X and Y varies with time during two complete revolutions of the coil.
Fig. 7.2
[3]
(ii) On Fig. 7.2, mark and label a point P, for the e.m.f. when the coil is horizontal, as shown
in Fig. 7.1. [1]
(iii) The student turns the handle more quickly.
State two ways in which the e.m.f. between terminals X and Y changes.
1. .......................................................................................................................................
2. .......................................................................................................................................
[2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/M/J/21

13
(b) Terminals X and Y are connected to the primary coil of a transformer.
State and explain what happens in the transformer as the student turns the handle of the a.c.
generator.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) Explain why the power losses in transmission cables are lower when electrical energy is
transmitted at higher voltages.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 11]

14
8 A student sets up a circuit that includes a 12 V battery, an 800 Ω resistor, a voltmeter and a
thermistor. Fig. 8.1 is an incomplete circuit diagram because the symbol for the thermistor is
missing.
800 Ω
12 V
P
V
Fig. 8.1
The thermistor is connected between terminals P and Q.
(a) Complete Fig. 8.1 by drawing the symbol for a thermistor between terminals P and Q. [1]
(b) The 12 V battery consists of eight identical cells connected in series.
Calculate the electromotive force (e.m.f.) of each cell.
e.m.f. = ......................................................... [1]
(c) The reading on the voltmeter is 8.0 V.
(i) Determine the resistance of the thermistor.
resistance = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) A few hours later, the student notices that the reading on the voltmeter is greater.
Explain what can be deduced from this observation.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/M/J/21

15
9 There are three naturally occurring isotopes of hydrogen: hydrogen-1, hydrogen-2 and hydrogen-3.
The nuclide notation for hydrogen-1 is 11
. H
(a) Write down the symbol, using nuclide notation, for:
hydrogen-2 ...................................
hydrogen-3. ..................................
[1]
(b) In a fusion reactor, a nucleus of hydrogen-2 and a nucleus of hydrogen-3 undergo fusion.
(i) State what is meant by nuclear fusion.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) The fusion reaction produces a free neutron and one other particle.
Write down, using nuclide notation, the equation that represents this reaction.
[3]
(c) Nuclear fusion in the Sun is the source of most but not all of the resources that are used to
generate electrical energy on Earth.
State two resources for which nuclear fusion in the Sun is not the source.
1. ..............................................................................................................................................
2. ..............................................................................................................................................
[2]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 0625/41/M/J/21

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 3 8 7 2 9 6 7 8 8 0 *
PHYSICS 0625/42
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
This document has 16 pages.
DC (ST/JG) 198540/2
2
1 (a) Fig. 1.1 shows a sealed weather balloon which is stationary in still air.
weather
balloon
instruments
Fig. 1.1
State whether the overall density of the balloon and its instruments is greater than, less than,
or the same as the density of the surrounding air.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) At night, the gas inside the balloon cools. The pressure of the air outside the balloon remains
the same.
(i) State whether the balloon rises, falls or remains stationary.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain your answer.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/M/J/21

3
(c) An object is released from the balloon. It starts at rest and eventually reaches a constant
speed.
(i) On the axes of Fig. 1.2, sketch a speed–time graph to show this motion.
speed
0
0 time
Fig. 1.2
[3]
(ii) State the values of the initial acceleration and the final acceleration of the object.
initial acceleration ..............................................................................................................
final acceleration ...............................................................................................................

[2]
[Total: 9]

4
2 (a) Define the moment of a force.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) Fig. 2.1 shows an object of negligible weight. The object is in equilibrium.
rope
object pulley
20 cm
pivot P
50 kg
mass
12 cm
force F
Fig. 2.1
The object is free to rotate about its pivot P.
Calculate the value of force F.
F = ......................................................... [2]
(c) Describe an experiment involving vertical forces to show that there is no net moment on an
object in equilibrium. You may draw a diagram in the space provided.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/M/J/21
5
3 Fig. 3.1 shows water flowing at very slow speed over a cliff edge.
water
cliff edge
15 m
rocks
Fig. 3.1
The water falls 15 m onto the rocks below.
(a) Show that the velocity of the water when it strikes the rocks is 17 m / s.
[4]
(b) 30 kg of water flows over the cliff edge every second.
Calculate the force exerted by the rocks on the falling water. Ignore any splashing.
force = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 7]

6
4 (a) Pollen particles are mixed into a liquid. They are seen to move when observed through a
microscope.
(i) Describe this movement.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Explain this movement in terms of the molecules of the liquid and the pollen particles.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(b) (i) Medical professionals sometimes rub ethanol over the skin of a patient. Ethanol
evaporates readily at room temperature and has a high specific latent heat of vaporisation.
State whether the patient experiences heating, cooling or neither at the site where the
ethanol is applied. Explain your answer.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) State any effect on the rate of evaporation of ethanol when a fan blows air over the
patient’s skin.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/M/J/21

7
5 (a) A machine delivers a hot drink in a plastic cup, which is uncomfortably hot to hold.
Fig. 5.1 shows the cup with the hot drink.
hot drink
plastic cup
Fig. 5.1
Fig. 5.2a shows the cup with the hot drink and a holder for the sides of the cup.
Fig. 5.2b shows a cross-section through the holder. The holder is made from two strong paper
cylinders separated by a wavy piece of strong paper to make air gaps.
hot drink
plastic cup holder
holder
Fig. 5.2a Fig. 5.2b
Explain how using the holder makes it more comfortable to hold the cup.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(b) A student carries out experiments on the cooling of the hot drink described in (a), with and
without the holder in place. He finds that the holder only reduces the rate of cooling slightly.
Suggest and explain another action that reduces the rate of cooling more effectively.
suggestion ................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) State the method of thermal energy transfer from a star through the vacuum of space.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

8
6 (a) Fig. 6.1 shows a ray of green light passing through a prism.
prism
ray of
green light
Fig. 6.1
A ray of blue light is directed towards the prism on the same path as the ray of green light.
On Fig. 6.1, draw the path of the blue light through and out of the prism. [3]
(b) The wavelength of the blue light in air is 4.8 × 10–7 m.
Calculate the frequency of the blue light.
frequency = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/M/J/21

9
7 (a) Fig. 7.1 shows two magnets and the gap between the N pole of one magnet and the S pole of
the other magnet.
Fig. 7.1
On Fig. 7.1, draw three lines to show the pattern and direction of the magnetic field in the
gap. [2]
(b) (i) Fig. 7.2 is a repeat of Fig. 7.1 showing the two magnets.
On Fig. 7.2, draw the position of a plotting compass needle when it comes to rest in the
gap between the N pole and the S pole.
Fig. 7.2 [1]
(ii) Explain why the needle comes to rest in this position.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(c) Describe a method of demagnetising a bar magnet.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
[Total: 7]
10
8 (a) Two identical radioactive sources emit α-particles and γ-rays into two vacuum tubes.
(i) Fig. 8.1 shows two electrically charged plates on either side of one of the vacuum tubes.
plate at +2500 V
vacuum
source
initial path of
beam of α-particles
and γ-rays
plate at –2500 V
Fig. 8.1
Write the symbol α once in Table 8.1 to indicate any deflection of the α-particles.
Write the symbol γ once in Table 8.1 to indicate any deflection of the γ-rays.
Table 8.1
towards bottom of towards top of

into page out of page no deflection
page page
[2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/M/J/21

11
(ii) Fig. 8.2 shows the poles of a very strong magnet on either side of the other vacuum
tube.
N pole of
strong magnet
vacuum
source N
initial path of
beam of α-particles S
and γ-rays
S pole of
strong magnet
Fig. 8.2
Write the symbol α once in Table 8.2 to indicate any deflection of the α-particles.
Write the symbol γ once in Table 8.2 to indicate any deflection of the γ-rays.
Table 8.2
towards bottom of towards top of

into page out of page no deflection
page page
[2]

12
(b) Fig. 8.3 shows a simple direct current (d.c.) electric motor with a split-ring commutator.
split-ring
brush
coil
N S
Fig. 8.3
(i) State and explain the direction of rotation of the coil as seen from point X.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) The coil rotates through 90° from the position shown.
State what happens to the moment in this position.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(iii) The coil is rotated through 180° from the position shown. By considering the forces on
the coil, explain how the split-ring commutator enables the motor to turn continuously.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 10]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/M/J/21

13
9 (a) Fig. 9.1 shows a circuit.
M A
Fig. 9.1
On Fig. 9.1, draw two clearly labelled arrows to show the direction of the electron flow and
the direction of the conventional current in the circuit. [2]
(b) The current in the motor is 13 A. The charge on an electron is 1.6 × 10–19 C.
Calculate the number of electrons that pass through the motor every second.
number of electrons = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 5]

14
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows the potential difference–current graph for a circuit component K.
10.0
8.0
potential difference / V
6.0
4.0
2.0
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0
current / mA
Fig. 10.1
Calculate the resistance of component K when the current in it is 4.0 mA.
resistance = ......................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/M/J/21

15
(b) Fig. 10.2 shows a circuit containing component K.
component K
point X
resistor R
Fig. 10.2
At low temperature, component K has a much greater resistance than resistor R.
At high temperature, component K has a much smaller resistance than resistor R.
State and explain the effect on the lamp when the temperature changes from very low to very
high.
Refer to the voltage at point X in your explanation.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [4]
(c) State the name of component K.
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
[Total: 7]

16
11 (a) A student investigates a radioactive substance in a laboratory.
Fig. 11.1 is a graph showing the count rate detected as the substance decays for 7.5 minutes.
250
count rate
counts / min
200
150
100
50
0
0 1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0 5.0 6.0 7.0 8.0
time / min
Fig. 11.1
The background radiation is 20 counts / min.
(i) Determine the half-life of the substance.
half-life = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) Calculate the count rate detected at time = 9.6 minutes.
count rate = .......................................counts / min [2]
(b) The substance emits α-particles and γ-rays. The student suggests that it is safe to store the
substance in a plastic container of thickness 2 mm.
State and explain whether the student’s suggestion is correct.
statement ..................................................................................................................................
explanation ...............................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 0625/42/M/J/21

Cambridge IGCSE™
* 1 1 4 5 4 7 0 3 0 6 *
PHYSICS 0625/43
1 hour 15 minutes
INSTRUCTIONS
INFORMATION
DC (ST/JG) 198539/3
2
1 Fig. 1.1 shows a load suspended from a spring.
spring
load
Fig. 1.1
The value of the spring constant k of the spring is 0.20 N / cm. The spring reaches its limit of
proportionality when the load is 15 N.
(a) Calculate the extension of the spring when the load is 3.0 N.
extension = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Explain what is meant by the term limit of proportionality of the spring.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(c) On Fig. 1.2, sketch an extension–load graph for a spring. Label the limit of proportionality with
the letter L on your graph.
extension
0
0 load
Fig. 1.2
[2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/M/J/21
3
(d) The load is pulled down a small distance below its equilibrium position to position A, as shown
in Fig. 1.3. The load then moves up and down between position A and position B in Fig. 1.3.
position B
position A
Fig. 1.3
Describe the energy transfers which occur as the load moves:
from position A to the equilibrium position
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
from the equilibrium position to position B.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
[3]
[Total: 9]

4
2 (a) Fig. 2.1 shows a bookshelf with two groups of books A and B on it. There are six books in
each group of books. All the books are identical. The mass of each book is 0.52 kg.
21 cm
1.3 cm
21 cm
30 cm
30 cm
1.3 cm
shelf
group A group B
of books of books
Fig. 2.1
(i) Explain why the pressure exerted on the shelf by the books in group B is less than the
pressure exerted on the shelf by the books in group A.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Calculate the pressure exerted on the shelf by the books in group A.
pressure = ......................................................... [3]
(b) A diver dives to a depth below the surface of the sea where the total pressure is 3.0 × 105 Pa.
The atmospheric pressure is 1.0 × 105 Pa. The density of the sea water is 1030 kg / m3.
Calculate the depth of the diver below the surface of the sea.
depth = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/M/J/21

5
3 A car travels at constant speed v on a horizontal, straight road. The driver sees an obstacle on the
road ahead.
(a) The distance travelled in the time between the driver seeing the obstruction and applying the
brakes is the thinking distance.
Explain why the thinking distance is directly proportional to v.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [1]
(b) When the brakes are applied, the car decelerates uniformly to rest. The frictional force applied
by the brakes is constant. The distance travelled between first applying the brakes and the
car stopping is the braking distance.
Explain why the braking distance is proportional to v 2.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
(c) The car is travelling at 22 m / s.
(i) The thinking distance is 15 m.
Calculate the time taken to travel the thinking distance.
time = ......................................................... [2]
(ii) The car has a mass of 1400 kg. The time taken for the car to stop after the brakes are
applied is 2.1 s.
Calculate the force required to stop the car in this time.
force = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 8]
6
4 (a) (i) Define specific latent heat of fusion.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(ii) A cup of water contains 250 cm3 of water at a temperature of 0 °C. An identical cup
contains 250 cm3 of a mixture of ice and water at a temperature of 0 °C.
The temperature of the surrounding air is 20 °C.
State and explain which cup contains the liquid with the lower temperature after
10 minutes.
statement ..........................................................................................................................
explanation ........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
(b) (i) On a hot day, sweat forms on a person’s skin and then evaporates.
Explain, in terms of molecules, how the evaporation of sweat cools the person.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [3]
(ii) Explain why this process is more effective when a wind is blowing.
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/M/J/21

7
5 (a) Fig. 5.1 shows a wave on the sea approaching a harbour.
harbour walls
harbour
wave crests
Fig. 5.1
(i) On Fig. 5.1, draw three wave crests in the harbour. [2]
(ii) Another harbour has a much wider gap between its walls.
Describe and explain how the pattern of wave crests in this harbour is different from the
pattern you have drawn in (i).
description ..........................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
explanation .........................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]

8
(b) A sound wave of frequency 850 Hz travels through sea water. The speed of sound in sea
water is 1500 m / s.
Calculate the wavelength of this sound wave in sea water.
wavelength = ......................................................... [2]
[Total: 6]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/M/J/21

9
6 Fig. 6.1 is a full-scale diagram of a lens and an object O.
lens
Fig. 6.1
(a) The focal length of the lens is 3.5 cm.
On Fig. 6.1, mark and label with the letter F the positions of the two principal focuses. [1]
(b) On Fig. 6.1, draw three rays to locate the image. Draw an arrow to represent the image and
label the image I. [3]
(c) State three properties of the image I.
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(d) A student incorrectly states that this lens is being used as a magnifying glass.
(i) State how the image produced by a magnifying glass is different from the image I.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) The student moves the object O to a position P so that the lens shown in Fig. 6.1 acts as
a magnifying glass.
On Fig. 6.1, mark a possible position for P. [1]
[Total: 8]

10
7 (a) Define electromotive force (e.m.f.).
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Fig. 7.1 shows a circuit.
12 V
P Q
Fig. 7.1
The two lamps shown are identical. Each lamp has a potential difference (p.d.) of 3.0 V across
it and a current of 2.0 A in it. PQ is a length of uniform metal wire. The resistance of PQ is R.
(i) Calculate the value of R.
R = ......................................................... [3]
(ii) Another piece of wire is made of the same metal as PQ. The length of the new piece
of wire is twice the length of PQ. The diameter of the new piece of wire is twice the
diameter of PQ.
Calculate the resistance of the new piece of wire.
resistance = ......................................................... [3]
[Total: 8]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/M/J/21

11
8 (a) State the difference between an analogue signal and a digital signal. You may draw a diagram
to help explain your answer.
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [2]
(b) Draw the symbol for a NOR gate.
[1]

12
(c) Fig. 8.1 shows a combination of logic gates X, Y and Z. The gates are not represented by the
standard symbols.
A logic
B gate D logic logic
X E F
gate gate
C
Y Z
Fig. 8.1
Table 8.1 shows a partly completed truth table for this combination of logic gates.
Table 8.1
intermediate
inputs output
points
A B C D E F
0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1
0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0
1 0 1 0 1
1 1 1 1 1
(i) From Table 8.1, deduce:
1. the name of logic gate X
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
2. the name of logic gate Y.
..................................................................................................................................... [1]
(ii) Logic gate Z is a NAND gate.
Complete column F of Table 8.1. [2]
[Total: 7]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/M/J/21

13
9 (a) An X-ray machine requires a supply of 110 kV. The mains electricity supply is 230 V. A
transformer is used to supply the correct voltage to the X-ray machine. There are 50 turns on
the primary coil of the transformer.
Calculate the number of turns on the secondary coil.
number of turns = ......................................................... [2]
(b) Draw a labelled diagram of a step-down transformer. On the labels, state a suitable material
for each of the components.
[3]
(c) Explain how a transformer operates.
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................
............................................................................................................................................. [3]
[Total: 8]

14
10 (a) Fig. 10.1 shows a beam of radiation in a vacuum. The beam contains α-particles, β-particles
and γ-rays.
region of uniform
magnetic field out of the page
beam of radiation,
containing α, β and
γ-rays
Fig. 10.1
The beam enters a region where there is a strong, uniform magnetic field. The direction of the
magnetic field is out of the page.
On Fig. 10.1, mark and label the paths through the magnetic field of:
(i) α-particles (label this path α) [1]
(ii) β-particles (label this path β) [2]
(iii) γ-rays (label this path γ). [1]
(b) Radioactive sources have many uses in medicine.
State two safety precautions which hospital staff take when working with γ-ray sources.
1. ...............................................................................................................................................
2. ......................................................................................................................................... [2]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/M/J/21

15
(c) The radioactive isotope iodine-131 is used as a tracer in medical diagnosis. A nucleus of
iodine-131 contains 53 protons and 78 neutrons. The symbol for iodine is I.
(i) Use nuclide notation to show this isotope of iodine.
[1]
(ii) Iodine-131 emits γ-radiation. It has a half-life of 8 hours.
Explain why this emission and this half-life make iodine-131 a suitable material for a
tracer in medical diagnosis.
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
...........................................................................................................................................
..................................................................................................................................... [2]
[Total: 9]
© UCLES 2021 0625/43/M/J/21

p4 Combined

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

p4 Combined

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Cambridge International Examinations

Cambridge International General Certificate of Secondary Education

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST

Answer all questions.

This document consists of 16 printed pages.

(a) The order to stop is given at time t = 0 s.

(i) State the speed of the car at t = 0 s.

(i) the deceleration of the car between t = 0.9 s and t = 4.0 s,

(ii) the total distance travelled by the car from t = 0 s.

© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16 [Turn over

The mass of the hammer head is 0.15 kg.

The hammer head stops after hitting the nail.

(a) Calculate the change in momentum of the hammer head.

change in momentum = ...........................................................[2]

(b) State the impulse given to the nail.

average force = ...........................................................[2]

© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

Calculate the initial speed v of the train.

© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16 [Turn over

4 (a) The source of solar energy is the Sun.

Calculate the thermal energy gained by the water in 5.0 s.

thermal energy = ...........................................................[3]

© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

(iii) The efficiency of the solar panel is 70%.

Calculate the power of the solar radiation incident on the panel.

© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16 [Turn over

p / kPa 250 500 750 1000

V / cm3 30.0 15.2 9.8 7.6

increases stays the same decreases

mass of gas in bubble

density of gas in bubble

© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

(i) On Fig. 6.1,

1. the loudness of the sound is increased at constant pitch,

2. the pitch of the sound is increased at constant loudness.

Calculate the depth of the sea beneath the ship.

7 (a) Explain what is meant by

(i) total internal reflection,

(ii) critical angle.

Calculate the refractive index of the glass.

refractive index = ...........................................................[2]

© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16 [Turn over

(i) the current in each lamp,

(ii) the current in the fuse,

© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

resistance increases resistance remains the same resistance decreases [1]

© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16 [Turn over

9 (a) (i) State what is meant by the direction of an electric field.

The electric field between the plates in Fig. 9.1 is uniform.

State and explain what happens to the oil drop.

© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

protons ......................... neutrons ......................... electrons ......................... [2]

(b) The background count rate of radioactivity in a laboratory is 30 counts / min.

© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16 [Turn over

input A input B output

State the name of this logic gate. ............................................................[1]

input A input B output

input A input B input C output D output E output F

© UCLES 2016 0625/42/F/M/16

Paper 4 Theory (Extended) May/June 2016

Candidates answer on the Question Paper.

READ THESE INSTRUCTIONS FIRST